software version 3.9 - emerson€¦ · software version 3.9.x ... 3- 6 3.8.1 control module...

228
Software Version 3.9.x NGA 2000 Software Manual for HFID Analyzer Module (combined with NGA 2000 Platform, MLT or CAT 200) www.EmersonProcess.com Instruction Manual HAS64E-IM-SW39 9/2010

Upload: doantruc

Post on 30-Aug-2018

232 views

Category:

Documents


0 download

TRANSCRIPT

Page 1: Software Version 3.9 - Emerson€¦ · Software Version 3.9.x ... 3- 6 3.8.1 Control module manufacturing data ... This also includes a self-test of the analyzer(s) or analyzer module(s)

Software Version 3.9.xNGA 2000 Software Manual forHFID Analyzer Module (combined withNGA 2000 Platform, MLT or CAT 200)

www.EmersonProcess.com

Instruction ManualHAS64E-IM-SW399/2010

Page 2: Software Version 3.9 - Emerson€¦ · Software Version 3.9.x ... 3- 6 3.8.1 Control module manufacturing data ... This also includes a self-test of the analyzer(s) or analyzer module(s)

ESSENTIAL INSTRUCTIONSREAD THIS PAGE BEFORE PROCEEDING!

Emerson Process Management (Rosemount Analytical) designs, manufactures and testsits products to meet many national and international standards. Because theseinstruments are sophisticated technical products, you MUST properly install, use, andmaintain them to ensure they continue to operate within their normal specifications. Thefollowing instructions MUST be adhered to and integrated into your safety program wheninstalling, using and maintaining Emerson Process Management (Rosemount Analytical)products. Failure to follow the proper instructions may cause any one of the followingsituations to occur: Loss of life; personal injury; property damage; damage to thisinstrument; and warranty invalidation.

• Read all instructions prior to installing, operating, and servicing the product.

• If you do not understand any of the instructions, contact your Emerson ProcessManagement (Rosemount Analytical) representative for clarification.

• Follow all warnings, cautions, and instructions marked on and supplied with theproduct.

• Inform and educate your personnel in the proper installation, operation, andmaintenance of the product.

• Install your equipment as specified in the Installation Instructions of theappropriate Instruction Manual and per applicable local and national codes.Connect all products to the proper electrical and pressure sources.

• To ensure proper performance, use qualified personnel to install, operate, update,program, and maintain the product.

• When replacement parts are required, ensure that qualified people use replacementparts specified by Emerson Process Management (Rosemount Analytical).Unauthorized parts and procedures can affect the product’s performance, place thesafe operation of your process at risk, and VOID YOUR WARRANTY. Look-alikesubstitutions may result in fire, electrical hazards, or improper operation.

• Ensure that all equipment doors are closed and protective covers are in place,except when maintenance is being performed by qualified persons, to preventelectrical shock and personal injury.

The information contained in this document is subject to change without notice.

1th Edition 9/2010

Emerson Process ManagementGmbH & Co. OHGIndustriestrasse 1D-63594 HasselrothGermanyT +49 (6055) 884 0F +49 (6055) 884 209www.emersonprocess.com

Page 3: Software Version 3.9 - Emerson€¦ · Software Version 3.9.x ... 3- 6 3.8.1 Control module manufacturing data ... This also includes a self-test of the analyzer(s) or analyzer module(s)

Contents

HAS64E-IM-SW39(1) [NGA-e (HFID-Software 3.9.x)] 08/10 NGA 2000 1

1 Introduction ………………………………………………………………………………………………… 1- 1 2 Menu Structure …………………………………………………………………………………………… 2- 1 3 Display and keyboard ……………………………………………………………………………………. 3- 1 3.1 Starting and Initializing …………………………………………………………………………................. 3- 1 3.2 Display and operation ……………………………………………………………………………………… 3- 2 3.3 The keyboard ……………………………………………………………………………………................ 3 -2 3.4 Menu items ………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 3- 3 3.5 Common F-key functions ………………………………………………………………………………….. 3- 4 3.6 Entering and editing parameters ………………………………………………………………………….. 3- 5 3.7 Current measurement parameters ……………………………………………………………................. 3- 5 3.8 The main menu ……………………………………………………………………………………………... 3- 6 3.8.1 Control module manufacturing data ………………………………………………………………………. 3- 7 3.8.2 Analyzer module manufacturing data …………………………………………………………………….. 3- 8 4 Basic controls …………………………………………………………………………………………….. 4- 1 4.1 Measurement ……………………………………………………………………………………………….. 4- 3 4.1.1 Changing channels …………………………………………………………………………………………. 4- 5 4.1.2 Changing the order of the multi-component display ……………………………………………………. 4- 7 4.1.3 Changing the measurement range ……………………………………………………………………….. 4- 9 4.1.4 Automatic range change …………………………………………………………………………………… 4- 13 4.1.5 Lighting the flame …………………………………………………………………………………………… 4- 17 4.2 Calibration …………………………………………………………………………………………………… 4- 21 4.2.1 Zeroing ………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 4- 23 4.2.2 Spanning …………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 4- 27 5 Analyzer and I/O, expert controls and set-up ………………………………………………………... 5- 1 5.1 Analyzer module setup ..................................................................................................................... 5- 3 5.1.1 Calibration gas list ............................................................................................................................. 5- 5 5.1.2 Calibration parameters ...................................................................................................................... 5- 13 5.1.3 Concentration alarm setup ................................................................................................................ 5- 15 5.1.4 Gas measurement parameters.......................................................................................................... 5- 17 5.1.4.1 Linearization parameters .................................................................................................................. 5- 19 5.1.4.2 Response time/delay parameters...................................................................................................... 5- 23 5.1.4.3 Range setting..................................................................................................................................... 5- 25 5.1.4.4 Automatic range change control........................................................................................................ 5- 27 5.1.4.5 Units................................................................................................................................................... 5- 29 5.1.4.6 Linearization functions....................................................................................................................... 5- 31 5.1.5 Analyzer parameter list...................................................................................................................... 5- 33 5.1.6 Displayed parameters........................................................................................................................ 5- 35 5.2 System & network I/O module controls & setup ................................................................................ 5- 37 5.2.1 System SIO module........................................................................................................................... 5- 39 5.2.1.1 Analog output setup........................................................................................................................... 5- 41 5.2.1.2 Serial interface setup......................................................................................................................... 5- 47 5.2.1.3 Relay outputs setup........................................................................................................................... 5- 49 5.2.2 System DIO module .......................................................................................................................... 5- 51 5.2.3 E/A module ………........................................................................................................................... 5- 55 5.3 Analyzer module controls .................................................................................................................. 5- 57 5.3.1 Physical measurements .................................................................................................................... 5- 59

Page 4: Software Version 3.9 - Emerson€¦ · Software Version 3.9.x ... 3- 6 3.8.1 Control module manufacturing data ... This also includes a self-test of the analyzer(s) or analyzer module(s)

2 NGA 2000 HAS64E-IM-SW39(1) [NGA-e (HFID-Software 3.9.x)] 08/10

6 System configuration and diagnostics.......................................................................................... 6- 1 6.1 Diagnostic menus ............................................................................................................................. 6- 3 6.1.1 Control module diagnostics ............................................................................................................... 6- 5 6.1.2 Analyzer module diagnostics ............................................................................................................ 6- 7 6.1.2.1 Power supply voltages ...................................................................................................................... 6- 9 6.1.2.2 Primary variable parameters.............................................................................................................. 6- 11 6.1.2.3 Physical measurement parameters .................................................................................................. 6- 13 6.1.2.4 Temperature control parameters ...................................................................................................... 6- 15 6.1.2.5 Miscellaneous control parameters .................................................................................................... 6- 17 6.1.2.6 Auto ignition parameters.................................................................................................................... 6- 19 6.1.2.7 Self test results ................................................................................................................................. 6- 21 6.1.2.8 Software diagnostics.......................................................................................................................... 6- 23 6.1.2.9 Analyzer start up ............................................................................................................................... 6- 25 6.2 Load/Save configuration (CM/MCA) ................................................................................................. 6- 27 6.3 Date and time..................................................................................................................................... 6- 29 6.4 Security codes .................................................................................................................................. 6- 31 6.5 Network module management........................................................................................................... 6- 33 6.6 Measurement display setup............................................................................................................... 6- 37 6.7 Miscellaneous ................................................................................................................................... 6- 39 7 Display controls .............................................................................................................................. 7- 1 Supplement: Calculator on Control Module Level (CM Calculator) ................................................................... Page 1 - 14 Programmable Logic Control on Control Module Level (CM PLC)...............................................Page 1 - 28 System Calibration ...........................................................................................................................Page 1 - 34

Page 5: Software Version 3.9 - Emerson€¦ · Software Version 3.9.x ... 3- 6 3.8.1 Control module manufacturing data ... This also includes a self-test of the analyzer(s) or analyzer module(s)

Introduction: 1

HAS64E-IM-SW39(1) [NGA-e (HFID-Software 3.9.x)] 08/10 NGA 2000 1 - 1

This software handbook describes the individual steps for successfully operating the HFID analyzer module and HFID analyzer (analyzer module in a platform) from the Emerson Process Management NGA 2000 series.

⇒ Chapter 2 contains an overview of the HFID software menu structure.

⇒ Chapter 3 introduces the user interface (display and keys) and the main menu with its submenus.

⇒ Chapter 4 describes the basic functions (measurement and calibration) in detail and step by step.

⇒ Chapter 5 describes the expert level for the configuration of the module and any I/O modules.

⇒ Chapter 6 describes the system configuration and diagnostics.

⇒ Chapter 7 contains information about the display controls.

Not all the contents of Chapter 5 are relevant to all users. Which sub-chapters are relevant depends on the configuration of the NGA 2000 system with regard to the following components:

Control module CM Analyzer module AM Input/ Output Modules I/O (SIO = Standard Input/ Output;

DIO = Digital Input/ Output) Network I/O Modules Analog output with 3 alarms I/O;

Auto-calibration I/O (“Autocal”); System Auto-calibration I/O (“Syscal”)

The following table gives the possible SIO/ DIO configurations:

System unit SIO/DIO Configuration Chapter HFID analyzer module (AM)

No front panel, i.e. no control unit.

Can be combined with a platform, an MLT analyzer, a TFID analyzer or a customer-specific control unit

1 local SIO and 1 local DIO (or 2 local DIOs) can be built into an MLT AM or a TFID AM only.

SIO and DIO in the AM can only be configured for the MLT/TFID channel.

No local HFID I/Os

See MLT/ TFID manual.

Platform (CM Software)

Control unit with front panel.

No measurement channels.

1 SIO and up to 4 DIOs can be built into the platform.

SIO and DIO can be configured for all AMs connected to the platform, e.g. for the HFID.

System I/Os

5.2

HFID analyzer (CM and HFID analyzer module software)

HFID analyzer: HFID AM in a platform with front panel

HFID analyzer module combined with MLT/ TFID analyzer, i.e. all control unit and HFID analyzer module functions are displayed.

1 SIO and 1 DIO (or 2 DIOs) can be built in to the MLT/ TFID analyzer (CM I/Os).

SIO and DIO can be configured for all AMs connected to the MLT/ TFID analyzer, e.g. HFID

System I/Os

5.2

Page 6: Software Version 3.9 - Emerson€¦ · Software Version 3.9.x ... 3- 6 3.8.1 Control module manufacturing data ... This also includes a self-test of the analyzer(s) or analyzer module(s)

NGA 2000 system with platform and HFID analyzer module

(additional manual)

NGA 2000 system with MLT analyzer and HFID analyzer module

MLT

AN

ALY

ZER

(additional manual)

1- 2 NGA 2000 HAS64E-IM-SW39(1) [NGA-e (HFID-Software 3.9.x)] 08/10

Page 7: Software Version 3.9 - Emerson€¦ · Software Version 3.9.x ... 3- 6 3.8.1 Control module manufacturing data ... This also includes a self-test of the analyzer(s) or analyzer module(s)

Introduction: 1

This manual concerns all HFID analyzer modules combined with a platform or an MLT analyzer. This manual is also relevant for the CAT 200, which consists of an MLT 1 in an Ex d housing which is operated via a touch-screen front panel or a magnetically operated front panel. There is a separate manual for the CAT 200 which includes all CAT-related issues. HFID analyzer modules operated via a customer-specific control unit are not described in this manual. Network I/O modules have their own manuals which should be consulted for further detail. In this manual, these I/O modules are only very briefly described. Further questions should be directed to our Service Support Center.

HAS64E-IM-SW39(1) [NGA-e (HFID-Software 3.9.x)] 08/10 NGA 2000 1 - 3

Page 8: Software Version 3.9 - Emerson€¦ · Software Version 3.9.x ... 3- 6 3.8.1 Control module manufacturing data ... This also includes a self-test of the analyzer(s) or analyzer module(s)

1- 4 NGA 2000 HAS64E-IM-SW39(1) [NGA-e (HFID-Software 3.9.x)] 08/10

Page 9: Software Version 3.9 - Emerson€¦ · Software Version 3.9.x ... 3- 6 3.8.1 Control module manufacturing data ... This also includes a self-test of the analyzer(s) or analyzer module(s)

Menu structure: 2

- Res

et …

=>

F2

- Cha

nnel

=>

F3

HAS64E-IM-SW39(1) [NGA-e (HFID-Software 3.9.x)] 08/10 NGA 2000 2 - 1

Page 10: Software Version 3.9 - Emerson€¦ · Software Version 3.9.x ... 3- 6 3.8.1 Control module manufacturing data ... This also includes a self-test of the analyzer(s) or analyzer module(s)

2- 2 NGA 2000 HAS64E-IM-SW39(1) [NGA-e (HFID-Software 3.9.x)] 08/10

Page 11: Software Version 3.9 - Emerson€¦ · Software Version 3.9.x ... 3- 6 3.8.1 Control module manufacturing data ... This also includes a self-test of the analyzer(s) or analyzer module(s)

Display and keyboard: 3

3.1. Starting and initializing On being powered up, the HFID analyzer module (whether on a platform or as part of an NGA network) runs through the initializing phase. This also includes a self-test of the analyzer(s) or analyzer module(s). The LCD screen displays the company name and software version number as well as a series of messages which indicate the status of the initialization cycle. Finally the single component display of the HFID is displayed, which serves as a starting point from which the main menu, the analyzer module status menu and, if appropriate, the multi-channel display of the analyzer network can be accessed.

HAS64E-IM-SW39(1) [NGA-e (HFID-Software 3.9.x)] 08/10 NGA 2000

3 - 1

LCDReset Abort

F1 F2 F3 F4 F5

(C) 2005 Emerson Process Management

NGA 2000 Control-Module Rev.3.9.4 / P017

Language: P017 / 01 / 00

Initializing Network Installing network interface

All the instructions for the basic controls (chapter 4) begin at the single component display. The actual display may vary from the illustrations in this manual, since it can be configured by the client.

Display Status... Main... Channel BasicCal

HFID_WO1000001

F1 F2 F3 F4 F5

Sample pressure: Oven temperature: Flame status: Raw signal:

232.5 hPa 191 C

ON 531756

6.28 ppm THC

0 Range: 2 25

490 61

900000

50 47 100000

Analyzer tag Can be set to any value. This is the factory setting: “WO” stands for “Work Order”

Page 12: Software Version 3.9 - Emerson€¦ · Software Version 3.9.x ... 3- 6 3.8.1 Control module manufacturing data ... This also includes a self-test of the analyzer(s) or analyzer module(s)

3.2. Display and operation The measurement display and all operational steps are carried out via the LCD screen. The keyboard itself comprises 5 function keys, 4 arrow keys and an Enter key. This handbook uses simplified sketches to represent the user interface:

Measure Status... Channel Lock... MFG Data

HFID_WO1000001 6.28 ppm-- Main Menu --

Analyzer basic controls (calibration) & setup...

Analyzer and I/O, expert controls & setup...

configuration and diagnostics...

controls... _______________________________________ Date: tag:

03:11:05 August 16, 2009 Emerson

F1 F2 F3 F4 F5

System Display______Time &System

The functions of the individual keys and the operation of the unit depend on: the configuration of the analyzer or analyzer module the optional modules (e.g. I/O modules) installed the menu currently displayed.

If the power supply is interrupted, all user-specific module parameters are saved in a battery-operated buffer.

3.3 The keyboard

Display Status… Main... Channel BasicCal

HFID_WO1000001

F1 F2 F3 F4 F5

Sample pressure: Oven temperature: Flame status: Raw signal:

232.5 hPa 191 C

ON 531756

6.28 ppm THC

0 Range: 2 25

490 61

900000

50 47 100000

Function keys: Function depends on the current menu and is displayed on the LCD screen above each key.

Enter key Confirm a selection; Execute the selected command; Change to the selected menu.

Arrow keys ↑ -key and ↓ -key: Move up or down within a menu; Change or edit a setting. ← -key and → -key: Change to previous or next submenu or page; Select an individual digit or character.

3- 2 NGA 2000 HAS64E-IM-SW39(1) [NGA-e (HFID-Software 3.9.x)] 08/10

Page 13: Software Version 3.9 - Emerson€¦ · Software Version 3.9.x ... 3- 6 3.8.1 Control module manufacturing data ... This also includes a self-test of the analyzer(s) or analyzer module(s)

Display and keyboard: 3

3.4 Menu items A menu item can be selected with the ↑ -key or the ↓ -key. A selected item is shown in inverted colors (white text against a black background). There are four different types of menu items:

Submenu... An item ending in three dots. Pressing the ↵ -key or the → -key accesses a submenu.

Command line ! An item ending in an exclamation point. Pressing the ↵ -key or the → -key executes the selected function.

Parameter: An item ending in a colon. Displays a parameter. Some parameters can be changed, others are read-only. If the parameter is editable, pressing the ↵ -key or the → -key puts the parameter into edit mode.

Text line An item not ending in any of the above punctuation marks. For information only; cannot be edited.

HAS64E-IM-SW39(1) [NGA-e (HFID-Software 3.9.x)] 08/10 NGA 2000 3 - 3

HOME ESCAPE ZERO SPAN

Function key labels

Submenu

Parameter

Text line HFID_WO1000001

F1 F2 F3 F4 F5

6.28 ppmBasic Controls

Measurement range number: Range upper limit: Span gas concentration: Automatic range change control: Sample flow: Ranges with valid calibration: Calibration status: Flame condition: Light Flame...

1 10.0 ppm 8.6 ppm Disabled

4301 ml/min 1&2&3&4

READY

ON

Page 14: Software Version 3.9 - Emerson€¦ · Software Version 3.9.x ... 3- 6 3.8.1 Control module manufacturing data ... This also includes a self-test of the analyzer(s) or analyzer module(s)

Measure.. Back...

HFID_WO1000001

F1 F2 F3 F4 F5

6.28 ppm

3- 4 NGA 2000 HAS64E-IM-SW39(1) [NGA-e (HFID-Software 3.9.x)] 08/10

-- System Reset --

Are you sure ???

System reset !

Command line

3.5 Common F-key functions

Display Change from the single component display to the multi-component display.

Measure Change from the main menu to the single component display.

Status Change to the “Current measurement parameters” display for the most important parameters and status information of the HFID module or the current channel.

Always F2, when this function is available. ch. 3.7, page 3-5.

Main Change from the single-component display to the main menu.

HOME Change from a submenu to the main menu.

ESCAPE or Back Change to the previous menu. Revert a changed, but not yet confirmed, parameter to its previous value.

Lock Locks all levels for which security has been activated. F4 in the main menu.

Channel Changes to a different channel within the same menu, if more than one channel is available. Each channel is cycled through in turn.

In the main menu the channels of all analyzers are available, in submenus only the channels of the currently selected analyzer module.

Page 15: Software Version 3.9 - Emerson€¦ · Software Version 3.9.x ... 3- 6 3.8.1 Control module manufacturing data ... This also includes a self-test of the analyzer(s) or analyzer module(s)

Display and keyboard: 3

3.6 Entering and editing parameters

The Enter key Pressing the Enter key when an editable parameter is selected will put that parameter into edit mode: only the value itself will be displayed white on black. Pressing the Enter key again will save the new value.

The ↑ -key and the ↓ -key: Depending on the value being edited, these keys will:

change the numerical value scroll through a list of options change a letter or other character

Numbers with more than one digit will generally be incremented or decremented. Letters are changed one at a time.

The ← -key and the → -key: Select an individual digit or character. Certain numerical parameters can be edited one digit at a time.

3.7 Current measurement parameters Pressing F2 (“Status”) in the single component display accesses the “Current measurement parameters” menu:

HAS64E-IM-SW39(1) [NGA-e (HFID-Software 3.9.x)] 08/10 NGA 2000 3 - 5

HOME ESCAPE MORE

HFID_WO1000001

F1 F2 F3 F4 F5

6.28 ppmCurrent measurement parameters

Status details... Measurement range number: Range change control: Flame condition: Linearization mode:

1 Local

ON DISABLED

STANDBY NORMAL FAILURE

25

Analyzer operational state: Analyzer alarm state: Alarm reporting level: Current total variable updates per second:

In this menu the status of the HFID analyzer module can be checked. Pressing F3 (“MORE”) accesses a second page; press F2 (“ESCAPE”) or the ← -key to return to the first page. Pressing the Enter key with the “Status details” line selected accesses further submenus listing error messages and many other details. These menus are informative only. None of the settings here can be changed; this can only be done via the “Basic controls”, “Analyzer module setup” and “Analyzer module controls” menus (chapters 4, 5.1 and 5.3 respectively).

Page 16: Software Version 3.9 - Emerson€¦ · Software Version 3.9.x ... 3- 6 3.8.1 Control module manufacturing data ... This also includes a self-test of the analyzer(s) or analyzer module(s)

3.8 The main menu Pressing F3 or the → -key in the single component display accesses the main menu. From this menu all levels of the HFID analyzer or analyzer module can be accessed allowing measurement, calibration and data transfer parameters to be set.

Measure Status... Channel Lock... MFG Data

HFID_WO1000001

F1 F2 F3 F4 F5

6.28 ppm-- Main Menu --

Analyzer basic controls (calibration) & setup... Analyzer and I/O, expert controls & setup... System configuration and diagnostics... Display controls... _____________________________________________Time & Date: System tag:

16:35:32 August 16, 2009 Emerson

Siehe Kapitel 4

Factory setting

To set: ch. 6.3, page 6-29

See chapter 7

See chapter 6

See chapter 5

See chapter 4

F1: Change to the single component display of the current channel F2: Change to the “Current measurement parameters” menu ch. 3.7, page 3-5 F3: Change to a different channel Channel Identifier F4: Lock level(s) using security codes ch. 6.4, page 6-31 F5: Change to the “Manufacturing Data” menu below Pressing F5 accesses submenus in which important information about the control module and the analyzer module can be found:

Measure <<< Back... >>>

HFID_WO1000001

F1 F2 F3 F4 F5

6.28 ppm-- Manufacturing Data --

Control module manufacturing data... Analyzer module manufacturing data...

3- 6 NGA 2000 HAS64E-IM-SW39(1) [NGA-e (HFID-Software 3.9.x)] 08/10

Page 17: Software Version 3.9 - Emerson€¦ · Software Version 3.9.x ... 3- 6 3.8.1 Control module manufacturing data ... This also includes a self-test of the analyzer(s) or analyzer module(s)

Display and keyboard: 3

3.8.1 Control module manufacturing data

Measure <<< Back... >>>

HFID_WO1000001

F1 F2 F3 F4 F5

6.28 ppm -- Manufacturing Data --

Control module manufacturing data... Analyzer module manufacturing data...

Measure Back... More

HFID_WO1000001

F1 F2 F3 F4 F5

6.28 ppm -- Control Module Manufacturing Data --

Copyright (c) 2005

Emerson Process Management

Manufacturing GmbH & Co. OHG Industriestrasse 1

D-63594 Hasselroth / Germany Tel (+49) 6055 884 - 0

FAX. (+49) 6055 884 - 209

Measure Back...

HFID_WO1000001

F1 F2 F3 F4 F5

6.28 ppm-- Control Module Version Information --

Serial number: Manufacturing date: Hardware revision: Software revision: Revision date: Revision time: Phrase dictionary version: Language:

CM1 20.05.2004

ACU02 R:3.9.0 D:Jul 17 2003

3.9.4 / P017 Nov 11 2005

12:01:04

P017 / 01 / 00 English

HAS64E-IM-SW39(1) [NGA-e (HFID-Software 3.9.x)] 08/10 NGA 2000 3 - 7

Page 18: Software Version 3.9 - Emerson€¦ · Software Version 3.9.x ... 3- 6 3.8.1 Control module manufacturing data ... This also includes a self-test of the analyzer(s) or analyzer module(s)

3.8.2 Analyzer module manufacturing data

Measure <<< Back... >>>

HFID_WO1000001

F1 F2 F3 F4 F5

6.28 ppm-- Manufacturing Data --

Control module manufacturing data... Analyzer module manufacturing data...

HOME ESCAPE

HFID_WO1000001

F1 F2 F3 F4 F5

6.28 ppmAnalyzer manufacturing data

More... Minimum range: Maximum range: Measured gas: Capillary: User tag number:

10.0 ppm 10000 ppm

THC 9.7 ml/min @ 3.5psig

HFID_WO1000001

RESET STORE

Measure Back... More...

HFID_WO1000001

F1 F2 F3 F4 F5

6.28 ppm-- Analyzer Module Manufacturing Data --

Copyright (c) 2005

Emerson Process Management

Manufacturing GmbH & Co. OHG Industriestrasse 1

D-63594 Hasselroth / Germany Tel. (+49) 6055 884 - 0

FAX. (+49) 6055 884 - 209

Measure Back...

HFID_WO1000001

F1 F2 F3 F4 F5

6.28 ppm-- Analyzer Module Version Information --

Serial number: Manufacturing date: Hardware revision: Software revision: Revision date:

sion time:

HFD1 02:28:10 February 01, 2005

0.5

3.9.4 / P017 Nov 11 2005

12:33:56 Revi

3- 8 NGA 2000 HAS64E-IM-SW39(1) [NGA-e (HFID-Software 3.9.x)] 08/10

Page 19: Software Version 3.9 - Emerson€¦ · Software Version 3.9.x ... 3- 6 3.8.1 Control module manufacturing data ... This also includes a self-test of the analyzer(s) or analyzer module(s)

Basic controls: 4 Introduction

Chapter 4 describes the most important basic functions which are needed to configure a HFID analyzer module with an NGA front panel. The following basic functions are available: Measurement Chapter 4.1, page 4-3 Calibration Chapter 4.2, page 4-21 The basic settings are fully explained and illustrated step by step. The two-column layout shows the user interface and the LCD screen of the NGA front panel on the left. This enables the user to follow each step and compare the illustrations with the analyzer display screen. On the right, each step is briefly described. Each sub-chapter begins and ends with a single component display. The keys to be pressed for each step are highlighted in black. See the example on the next page.

HAS64E-IM-SW39(1) [NGA-e (HFID-Software 3.9.x)] 08/ 10 NGA 2000 4 - 1

Page 20: Software Version 3.9 - Emerson€¦ · Software Version 3.9.x ... 3- 6 3.8.1 Control module manufacturing data ... This also includes a self-test of the analyzer(s) or analyzer module(s)

Example: Changing from the single component display to the main menu ⇒ The first illustration shows the initial situation ⇒ Pressing key F3 changes the display to that in the second illustration

4- 2 NGA 2000 HAS64E-IM-SW39(1) [NGA-e (HFID-Software 3.9.x)] 08/ 10

1. Change to the main menu Press F3 or the → -key.

Display Status... Main... Channel BasicCal

HFID_WO1000001

F1 F2 F3 F4 F5

Sample pressure: Oven temperature: Flame status: Raw signal:

232.5 hPa 191 C

ON 531756

6.28 ppm THC

0 Range: 1 10

490 61

900000

50 47 100000

2. Any further instructions follow, e.g.: Change to the basic controls Press the ↵ -key or the → -key.

Measure Status... Channel Lock... MFG Data

HFID_WO1000001

F1 F2 F3 F4 F5

6.28 ppm-- Main Menu --

Analyzer basic controls (calibration) & setup... Analyzer and I/O, expert controls & setup... System configuration and diagnostics... Display controls... _____________________________________________ Time & Date: System tag:

16:35:32 August 16, 2009 Emerson

Page 21: Software Version 3.9 - Emerson€¦ · Software Version 3.9.x ... 3- 6 3.8.1 Control module manufacturing data ... This also includes a self-test of the analyzer(s) or analyzer module(s)

Basic controls: 4.1 Measurement

This subchapter describes the following functions:

Changing channels Chapter 4.1.1, page 4-5

Changing the order of the multi-component display Chapter 4.1.2, page 4-7

Changing the measurement range Chapter 4.1.3, page 4-9

Automatic range change Chapter 4.1.4, page 4-13

Lighting the flame Chapter 4.1.5, page 4-17

Chapters 4.1.1 and 4.1.2 are only relevant to systems with more than one measurement channel.

HAS64E-IM-SW39(1) [NGA-e (HFID-Software 3.9.x)] 08/10 NGA 2000 4 - 3

Page 22: Software Version 3.9 - Emerson€¦ · Software Version 3.9.x ... 3- 6 3.8.1 Control module manufacturing data ... This also includes a self-test of the analyzer(s) or analyzer module(s)

4- 4 NGA 2000 HAS64E-IM-SW39(1) [NGA-e (HFID-Software 3.9.x)] 08/10

Page 23: Software Version 3.9 - Emerson€¦ · Software Version 3.9.x ... 3- 6 3.8.1 Control module manufacturing data ... This also includes a self-test of the analyzer(s) or analyzer module(s)

Basic controls: 4.1.1 Changing channels

Display Status... Main... Channel BasicCal

HFID_WO1000001

F1 F2 F3 F4 F5

Sample pressure: Oven temperature: Flame status: Raw signal:

232.5 hPa 191 C

ON 531756

6.28 ppm THC

0 Range: 1 10

490 61

900000

50 47 100000

1. Change to the multi-component display Press F1. Note: The multi-component display can be reached from any single component display by this method.

LCDReset

F1 F2 F3 F4 F5

Select Status... Tags Off

MLT25/CH2/R2ppm SO2333.0

MLT25/CH3/R2ppm NO150.0

MLT25/CH4/R2%O220.00

HFIDppm THC 6.28

MLT25/CH1/R2ppm CO45.00

00000

1010101010

[1][2][3][4][5]

2. Activate select function Press F1 or the ↓ -key. Note: If there are no other channels connected to the HFID, only the bargraph of the HFID itself will be displayed. A change of channels will then not be possible.

LCDReset

2. Select a channel Press the ↑ or ↓ -key until the > symbol appears in the line you wish to select.

F1 F2 F3 F4 F5

Select Status... Tags Off

MLT25/CH2/R2ppm SO2333.0

MLT25/CH3/R2ppm NO150.0

MLT25/CH4/R2%O220.00

HFID ppm THC 6.28

MLT25/CH1/R2ppm CO45.00

0 0

0

0 0

1010101010

[1][2]

[3][4][5]

>

HAS64E-IM-SW39(1) [NGA-e (HFID-Software 3.9.x)] 08/10 NGA 2000 4 - 5

Page 24: Software Version 3.9 - Emerson€¦ · Software Version 3.9.x ... 3- 6 3.8.1 Control module manufacturing data ... This also includes a self-test of the analyzer(s) or analyzer module(s)

3. Return to the single component display Press F1 key .

LCDReset

F1 F2 F3 F4 F5

Select Status... Tags Off

MLT25/CH2/R2 ppm SO2 333.0

MLT25/CH3/R2 ppm NO 150.0

MLT25/CH4/R2 %O2 20.00

HFID ppm THC 6.28

MLT25/CH1/R2 ppm CO 45.00

0 0

0

0 0

1010101010

[1] [2]

[3] [4] [5]

>

Display Status... Main... Channel BasicCal

MLT 25/CH1/R2

F1 F2 F3 F4 F5

Temperature: Failures: Check Requests: Operation:

51.4 C No No

Ready

45.28 ppm CO

0 Range: 2 250

100

0.0 100000

4. The single component display after selecting a new channel.

4- 6 NGA 2000 HAS64E-IM-SW39(1) [NGA-e (HFID-Software 3.9.x)] 08/10

Page 25: Software Version 3.9 - Emerson€¦ · Software Version 3.9.x ... 3- 6 3.8.1 Control module manufacturing data ... This also includes a self-test of the analyzer(s) or analyzer module(s)

Basic controls: 4.1.2 Changing the order of the multi-component display

Display Status... Main... Channel BasicCal

HFID_WO1000001

F1 F2 F3 F4 F5

Sample pressure: Oven temperature: Flame status: Raw signal:

232.5 hPa 191 C

ON 531756

6.28 ppm THC

0 Range: 1 10

490 61

900000

50 47 100000

1. Change to the multi-component display Press F1.

LCDReset

F1 F2 F3 F4 F5

Select Status... Tags Off

MLT25/CH2/R2ppm SO2333.0

MLT25/CH3/R2ppm NO150.0

MLT25/CH4/R2%O220.00

HFID ppm THC 6.28

MLT25/CH1/R2ppm CO45.00

0 0

0

0 0

1010101010

[1][2]

[3][4][5]

2. Activate select function Press F1 or the ↓ -key. Note: If no other channels are connected to the HFID, only the bargraph of the HFID itself will be displayed, and steps to change the order are superfluous.

LCDReset

2. Select a channel to appear in the first line Press the ↑ or ↓ -key until the > symbol is next to the appropriate bargraph. Example: MLT channel 2 (SO2) is to be displayed in the first line.

F1 F2 F3 F4 F5

Select Status... Tags Off

MLT25/CH2/R2ppm SO2333.0

MLT25/CH3/R2ppm NO150.0

MLT25/CH4/R2%O220.00

HFID ppm THC 6.28

MLT25/CH1/R2ppm CO45.00

0 0

0

0 0

1010101010

[1][2]

[3][4][5]

>

HAS64E-IM-SW39(1) [NGA-e (HFID-Software 3.9.x)] 08/10 NGA 2000 4 - 7

Page 26: Software Version 3.9 - Emerson€¦ · Software Version 3.9.x ... 3- 6 3.8.1 Control module manufacturing data ... This also includes a self-test of the analyzer(s) or analyzer module(s)

3. Set the selected bargraph to the first line Press the ↵ -key.

LCDReset

F1 F2 F3 F4 F5

Select... Display Tags Off

MLT25/CH2/R2 ppm SO2 333.0

MLT25/CH3/R2 ppm NO 150.0

MLT25/CH4/R2 %O2 20.00

HFID ppm THC 6.28

MLT25/CH1/R2 ppm CO 45.00

0 0

0

0 0

1010101010

[1] [2]

[3] [4] [5]

>

4. The multi-component display after setting the order of bargraphs

LCDReset

F1 F2 F3 F4 F5

Select Status... Tags Off

MLT25/CH1/R2 ppm CO 45.00

MLT25/CH3/R2 ppm NO 150.0

MLT25/CH4/R2 %O2 20.00

MLT25/CH2/R2 ppm SO2 333.0

HFID ppm THC 6.28

0 0

0

0 0

1010101010

[1] [2]

[3] [4] [5]

It is now possible to select any single component display. See chapter 4.1.1 for further instructions.

4- 8 NGA 2000 HAS64E-IM-SW39(1) [NGA-e (HFID-Software 3.9.x)] 08/10

Page 27: Software Version 3.9 - Emerson€¦ · Software Version 3.9.x ... 3- 6 3.8.1 Control module manufacturing data ... This also includes a self-test of the analyzer(s) or analyzer module(s)

Basic controls: 4.1.3 Changing the measurement range

1. Change to the main menu Press F3 or the → -key.

Display Status... Main... Channel BasicCal

HFID_WO1000001

F1 F2 F3 F4 F5

Sample pressure: Oven temperature: Flame status: Raw signal:

232.5 hPa 191 C

ON 531756

6.28 ppm THC

0 Range: 1 10

490 61

900000

50 47 100000

2. Change to the basic controls Press the ↵ -key or the → -key.

Measure Status... Channel Lock... MFG Data

HFID_WO1000001

F1 F2 F3 F4 F5

6.28 ppm-- Main Menu --

Analyzer basic controls (calibration) & setup... Analyzer and I/O, expert controls & setup... System configuration and diagnostics... Display controls... _____________________________________________ Time & Date: System tag:

16:35:32 August 16, 2009 Emerson

3. Select “Measurement range number” Press the ↵ -key or the → -key.

HOME ESCAPE ZERO SPAN

HFID_WO1000001

F1 F2 F3 F4 F5

6.28 ppmBasic Controls

Measurement range number: Range upper limit: Span gas concentration: Automatic range change control: Sample flow: Ranges with valid calibration: Calibration status: Flame condition: Light Flame...

1

10.0 ppm 8.6 ppm Disabled

4296 ml/min 1&2&3&4

READY

ON

HAS64E-IM-SW39(1) [NGA-e (HFID-Software 3.9.x)] 08/10 NGA 2000 4 - 9

Page 28: Software Version 3.9 - Emerson€¦ · Software Version 3.9.x ... 3- 6 3.8.1 Control module manufacturing data ... This also includes a self-test of the analyzer(s) or analyzer module(s)

4. Set the new range number Press the ↑-key or the ↓ -key until the required range number appears. Example: Changing from range 1 to range 2.

Back...

HFID_WO1000001

F1 F2 F3 F4 F5

6.28 ppmBasic Controls

Measurement range number: Range upper limit: Span gas concentration: Automatic range change control: Sample flow: Ranges with valid calibration: Calibration status: Flame condition: Light Flame...

1

10.0 ppm 8.6 ppm Disabled

4296 ml/min 1&2&3&4

READY

ON

Back...

HFID_WO1000001

F1 F2 F3 F4 F5

6.28 ppmBasic Controls

Measurement range number: Range upper limit: Span gas concentration: Automatic range change control: Sample flow: Ranges with valid calibration: Calibration status: Flame condition: Light Flame...

2

10.0 ppm 8.6 ppm Disabled

4296 ml/min 1&2&3&4

READY

ON

5. Confirm range number Press the ↵ -key. Note: To cancel the change and return to the previous value, press F2.

HOME ESCAPE ZERO SPAN

HFID_WO1000001

F1 F2 F3 F4 F5

6.28 ppmBasic Controls

Measurement range number: Range upper limit: Span gas concentration: Automatic range change control: Sample flow: Ranges with valid calibration: Calibration status: Flame condition: Light Flame...

2

100 ppm 96 ppm

Disabled 4296 ml/min

1&2&3&4 READY

ON

6 Change to the main menu Press the ← -key or F1. Note: The range upper limit (2nd line) automatically changes to the value previously set for the selected range.

4- 10 NGA 2000 HAS64E-IM-SW39(1) [NGA-e (HFID-Software 3.9.x)] 08/10

Page 29: Software Version 3.9 - Emerson€¦ · Software Version 3.9.x ... 3- 6 3.8.1 Control module manufacturing data ... This also includes a self-test of the analyzer(s) or analyzer module(s)

Basic controls: 4.1.3 Changing the measurement range

7. Change to the single component display Press F1.

Measure Status... Channel Lock... MFG Data

HFID_WO1000001

F1 F2 F3 F4 F5

6.28 ppm-- Main Menu --

Analyzer basic controls (calibration) & setup... Analyzer and I/O, expert controls & setup... System configuration and diagnostics... Display controls... _____________________________________________ Time & Date: System tag:

16:35:44 August 16, 2009 Emerson

8. The single component display showing the new measurement range

Display Status... Main... Channel BasicCal

HFID_WO1000001

F1 F2 F3 F4 F5

Sample pressure: Oven temperature: Flame status: Raw signal:

232.5 hPa 191 C

ON 531756

6.28 ppm THC

0 Range: 2 25

490 61

900000

50 47 100000

HAS64E-IM-SW39(1) [NGA-e (HFID-Software 3.9.x)] 08/10 NGA 2000 4 - 11

Page 30: Software Version 3.9 - Emerson€¦ · Software Version 3.9.x ... 3- 6 3.8.1 Control module manufacturing data ... This also includes a self-test of the analyzer(s) or analyzer module(s)

4- 12 NGA 2000 HAS64E-IM-SW39(1) [NGA-e (HFID-Software 3.9.x)] 08/10

Page 31: Software Version 3.9 - Emerson€¦ · Software Version 3.9.x ... 3- 6 3.8.1 Control module manufacturing data ... This also includes a self-test of the analyzer(s) or analyzer module(s)

Basic controls: 4.1.4 Automatic range change

1. Change to the main menu Press F3 or the → -key.

Display Status... Main... Channel BasicCal

HFID_WO1000001

F1 F2 F3 F4 F5

Sample pressure: Oven temperature: Flame status: Raw signal:

232.5 hPa 191 C

ON 531756

6.28 ppm THC

0 Range: 1 10

490 61

900000

50 47 100000

2. Change to the basic controls Press the ↵ -key or the → -key.

Measure Status... Channel Lock... MFG Data

HFID_WO1000001

F1 F2 F3 F4 F5

6.28 ppm-- Main Menu --

Analyzer basic controls (calibration) & setup... Analyzer and I/O, expert controls & setup... System configuration and diagnostics... Display controls... _____________________________________________ Time & Date: System tag:

16:35:32 August 16, 2009 Emerson

3. Select menu item “Automatic range change control” Press the ↑-key or the ↓ -key until the line “Automatic range change control” is displayed against a black background.

HOME ESCAPE ZERO SPAN

HFID_WO1000001

F1 F2 F3 F4 F5

6.28 ppmBasic Controls

Measurement range number: Range upper limit: Span gas concentration: Automatic range change control: Sample flow: Ranges with valid calibration: Calibration status: Flame condition: Light Flame...

1

10.0 ppm 8.6 ppm Disabled

4296 ml/min 1&2&3&4

READY

ON

HAS64E-IM-SW39(1) [NGA-e (HFID-Software 3.9.x)] 08/10 NGA 2000 4 - 13

Page 32: Software Version 3.9 - Emerson€¦ · Software Version 3.9.x ... 3- 6 3.8.1 Control module manufacturing data ... This also includes a self-test of the analyzer(s) or analyzer module(s)

HOME ESCAPE ZERO SPAN

HFID_WO1000001

F1 F2 F3 F4 F5

6.28 ppmBasic Controls

Measurement range number: Range upper limit: Span gas concentration: Automatic range change control: Sample flow: Ranges with valid calibration: Calibration status: Flame condition: Light Flame...

1

10.0 ppm 8.6 ppm Disabled

4296 ml/min 1&2&3&4

READY

ON

Back...

HFID_WO1000001

F1 F2 F3 F4 F5

6.28 ppmBasic Controls

Measurement range number: Range upper limit: Span gas concentration: Automatic range change control: Sample flow: Ranges with valid calibration: Calibration status: Flame condition: Light Flame...

1

10.0 ppm 8.6 ppm

Disabled 4296 ml/min

1&2&3&4 READY

ON

The following settings are available:

Disabled Automatic range change control is switched off.

Enabled:SLC On The new switch level is automatically calculated (see ch. 5.1.4.4, page 5-27).

Enabled: SLC Off The new switch level is not automatically calculated.

5. Set the required value Press the ↑-key or the ↓ -key until the required value is displayed.

4. Select the item Press the ↵ -key or the → -key.

4- 14 NGA 2000 HAS64E-IM-SW39(1) [NGA-e (HFID-Software 3.9.x)] 08/10

Page 33: Software Version 3.9 - Emerson€¦ · Software Version 3.9.x ... 3- 6 3.8.1 Control module manufacturing data ... This also includes a self-test of the analyzer(s) or analyzer module(s)

Basic controls: 4.1.4 Automatic range change

HAS64E-IM-SW39(1) [NGA-e (HFID-Software 3.9.x)] 08/10 NGA 2000 4 - 15

Press the ↵ -key. Note: To cancel the change and return to the previous value, press F2.

6. Confirm new setting

Back...

HFID_WO1000001

F1 F2 F3 F4 F5

6.28 ppmBasic Controls

Measurement range number: Range upper limit: Span gas concentration: Automatic range change control: Sample flow: Ranges with valid calibration: Calibration status: Flamen condition: Light Flame...

1

8.6 ppm 10.0 ppm

Enabled:SLC Off 4296 ml/min

1&2&3&4 READY

ON

7. Change to the main menu Press the ← -key or F1.

HOME ESCAPE ZERO SPAN

HFID_WO1000001

F1 F2 F3 F4 F5

6.28 ppmBasic Controls

Measurement range number: Range upper limit: Span gas concentration: Automatic range change control: Sample flow: Ranges with valid calibration: Calibration status: Flame condition: Light Flame...

1

10.0 ppm 8.6 ppm

Enabled:SLC Off 4296 ml/min

1&2&3&4 READY

ON

Measure Status... Channel Lock... MFG Data

Press F1.

8. Change to the single component display

HFID_WO1000001

F1 F2 F3 F4 F5

6.28 ppm-- Main Menu --

Analyzer basic controls (calibration) & setup... Analyzer and I/O, expert controls & setup... System configuration and diagnostics... Display controls... _____________________________________________ Time & Date: System tag:

16:36:05 August 16, 2009 Emerson

Page 34: Software Version 3.9 - Emerson€¦ · Software Version 3.9.x ... 3- 6 3.8.1 Control module manufacturing data ... This also includes a self-test of the analyzer(s) or analyzer module(s)

9. The single component display after completion of the preceding steps

Display Status... Main... Channel BasicCal

HFID_WO1000001

F1 F2 F3 F4 F5

Sample pressure: Oven temperature: Flame status: Raw signal:

232.5 hPa 191 C

ON 531756

6.28 ppm THC

0 Range: 1 10

490 61

900000

50 47 100000

4- 16 NGA 2000 HAS64E-IM-SW39(1) [NGA-e (HFID-Software 3.9.x)] 08/10

Page 35: Software Version 3.9 - Emerson€¦ · Software Version 3.9.x ... 3- 6 3.8.1 Control module manufacturing data ... This also includes a self-test of the analyzer(s) or analyzer module(s)

Basic controls: 4.1.5 Lighting the flame

1. Change to the main menu Press F3 or the → -key. Note: When the flame is unlit, the HFID will show an obviously nonsensical measurement. The line “Flame status” shows the value “OFF”. In order to use the HFID, the flame must be lit.

Display Status... Main... Channel BasicCal

HFID_WO1000001

F1 F2 F3 F4 F5

Sample pressure: Oven temperature: Flame status: Raw signal:

232.5 hPa 191 C

OFF 524401

-4.76 ppm THC

0 Range: 1 10

490 61

900000

50 47 100000

2. Change to the basic controls Press the ↵ -key or the → -key.

Measure Status... Channel Lock... MFG Data

HFID_WO1000001

F1 F2 F3 F4 F5

-4.76 ppm-- Main Menu --

Analyzer basic controls (calibration) & setup... Analyzer and I/O, expert controls & setup... System configuration and diagnostics... Display controls... _____________________________________________ Time & Date: System tag:

16:02:09 August 16, 2009 Emerson

3. Select menu item “Light Flame” Press the ↑-key or the ↓ -key until the line “Light flame” is displayed against a black background.

HOME ESCAPE ZERO SPAN

HFID_WO1000001

F1 F2 F3 F4 F5

-4.76 ppmBasic Controls

Measurement range number: Range upper limit: Span gas concentration: Automatic range change control: Sample flow: Ranges with valid calibration: Calibration status: Flame condition: Light Flame...

1

10.0 ppm 8.6 ppm Disabled

4296 ml/min 1&2&3&4

READY

OFF

HAS64E-IM-SW39(1) [NGA-e (HFID-Software 3.9.x)] 08/10 NGA 2000 4 - 17

Page 36: Software Version 3.9 - Emerson€¦ · Software Version 3.9.x ... 3- 6 3.8.1 Control module manufacturing data ... This also includes a self-test of the analyzer(s) or analyzer module(s)

HOME ESCAPE ZERO SPAN

HFID_WO1000001

F1 F2 F3 F4 F5

-4.76 ppmBasic Controls

Measurement range number: Range upper limit: Span gas concentration: Automatic range change control: Sample flow: Ranges with valid calibration: Calibration status: Flame condition: Light Flame...

1

10.0 ppm 8.6 ppm Disabled

4296 ml/min 1&2&3&4

READY

OFF

HOME ABORT LIGHT ENRICH

HFID_WO1000001

F1 F2 F3 F4 F5

-4.76 ppmLight Flame

Flame condition: Auto-ignition: Ignition system enable: Number of ignition attempts so far: Time on this cycle - secs: Fuel supply pressure: Burner air pressure: Sample pressure: Purge gas pressure: Flame temperature: Status:

OFF ENABLED

ON 0 0

1679.9 hPa 1042 hPa 230 hPa 691 hPa

191 C AIR PRESSURE TOO LOW

The flame can only be lit when the system has been successfully purged. The following conditions must be met for the purge cycle to commence:

Purge gas pressure no less than 680 hPa Purge gas flow between approx. 16 and 18 l/min Small difference in pressure outside and inside the case

Before the flame can be ignited, the system must have been successfully purged. In addition, the following conditions must be met:

Burner air pressure approx. 1040 hPa Sample gas pressure approx. 340 or 140 hPa, depending on the type of capillaries

5. Check values and light flame If the values shown are within certain limits, the flame can be lit. Press F3.

4. Select the item Press the ↵ -key or the → -key.

4- 18 NGA 2000 HAS64E-IM-SW39(1) [NGA-e (HFID-Software 3.9.x)] 08/10

Page 37: Software Version 3.9 - Emerson€¦ · Software Version 3.9.x ... 3- 6 3.8.1 Control module manufacturing data ... This also includes a self-test of the analyzer(s) or analyzer module(s)

Basic controls: 4.1.5 Lighting the flame

ABORT

HFID_WO1000001

F1 F2 F3 F4 F5

-4.76 ppmLight Flame

Flame condition: Auto-ignition: Ignition system enable: Number of ignition attempts so far: Time on this cycle - secs: Fuel supply pressure: Burner air pressure: Sample pressure: Purge gas pressure: Flame temperature: Status:

OFF ENABLED

ON 0

15 1679.9 hPa

1042 hPa 230 hPa 691 hPa

191 C AIR PRESSURE TOO LOW

ABORT

HFID_WO1000001

F1 F2 F3 F4 F5

-4.76 ppmLight Flame

Flame condition: Auto-ignition: Ignition system enable: Number of ignition attempts so far: Time on this cycle - secs: Fuel supply pressure: Burner air pressure: Sample pressure: Purge gas pressure: Flame temperature: Status:

OFF ENABLED

ON 0

72 1679.9 hPa

1042 hPa 230 hPa 691 hPa

191 C PARAMETERS NORMAL

The HFID can be configured to start a new cycle automatically after a failed ignition attempt. The maximum number of attempts can be set in the “Auto ignition parameters” menu (see chapter 6.1.2.6, page 6-19).

By default the HFID makes up to 3 attempts.

7. Flame is ignited The flame temperature rises. If it remains steady at more than 115°C, the flame has been successfully lit.

6. Burner air is enriched The line “Time on this cycle” starts counting the seconds. Note: To abort the procedure, press F2.

HAS64E-IM-SW39(1) [NGA-e (HFID-Software 3.9.x)] 08/10 NGA 2000 4 - 19

Page 38: Software Version 3.9 - Emerson€¦ · Software Version 3.9.x ... 3- 6 3.8.1 Control module manufacturing data ... This also includes a self-test of the analyzer(s) or analyzer module(s)

8. Change to the main menu Press the ← -key or F1.

HOME ABORT LIGHT ENRICH

HFID_WO1000001

F1 F2 F3 F4 F5

6.28 ppmLight Flame

Flame condition: Auto-ignition: Ignition system enable: Number of ignition attempts so far: Time on this cycle - secs: Fuel supply pressure: Burner air pressure: Sample pressure: Purge gas pressure: Flame temperature: Status:

ON ENABLED

ON 0

81 1679.9 hPa

1042 hPa 230 hPa 691 hPa

191 C PARAMETERS NORMAL

9. Change to the single component display Press F1.

Measure Status... Channel Lock... MFG Data

HFID_WO1000001

F1 F2 F3 F4 F5

6.28 ppm-- Main Menu --

Analyzer basic controls (calibration) & setup... Analyzer and I/O, expert controls & setup... System configuration and diagnostics... Display controls... _____________________________________________ Time & Date: System tag:

16:03:45 June 15, 2005 Emerson

Display Status... Main... Channel BasicCal

HFID_WO1000001

F1 F2 F3 F4 F5

Sample pressure: Oven temperature: Flame status: Raw signal:

232.5hPa 191 C

ON 531756

6.28 ppm THC

0 Range: 2 25

490 61

900000

50 47 100000

10. The single component display after lighting the flame

4- 20 NGA 2000 HAS64E-IM-SW39(1) [NGA-e (HFID-Software 3.9.x)] 08/10

Page 39: Software Version 3.9 - Emerson€¦ · Software Version 3.9.x ... 3- 6 3.8.1 Control module manufacturing data ... This also includes a self-test of the analyzer(s) or analyzer module(s)

Basic controls: 4.2 Calibration

This subchapter describes the following functions:

Zeroing Chapter 4.2.1, page 4-23

Spanning Chapter 4.2.2, page 4-27

Before the HFID can be used, each measurement range must be successfully zeroed and spanned. Zeroing should be performed first.

HAS64E-IM-SW39(1) [NGA-e (HFID-Software 3.9.x)] 08/10 NGA 2000 4 - 21

Page 40: Software Version 3.9 - Emerson€¦ · Software Version 3.9.x ... 3- 6 3.8.1 Control module manufacturing data ... This also includes a self-test of the analyzer(s) or analyzer module(s)

4- 22 NGA 2000 HAS64E-IM-SW39(1) [NGA-e (HFID-Software 3.9.x)] 08/10

Page 41: Software Version 3.9 - Emerson€¦ · Software Version 3.9.x ... 3- 6 3.8.1 Control module manufacturing data ... This also includes a self-test of the analyzer(s) or analyzer module(s)

Basic controls: 4.2.1 Zeroing

1. Change to the main menu Press F3 or the → -key.

Display Status... Main... Channel BasicCal

HFID_WO1000001

F1 F2 F3 F4 F5

Sample pressure: Oven temperature: Flame status: Raw signal:

232.5 hPa 191 C

ON 531756

6.28 ppm THC

0 Range: 1 10

490 61

900000

50 47 100000

2. Change to the basic controls Press the ↵ -key or the → -key.

Measure Status... Channel Lock... MFG Data

HFID_WO1000001

F1 F2 F3 F4 F5

6.28 ppm-- Main Menu --

Analyzer basic controls (calibration) & setup... Analyzer and I/O, expert controls & setup... System configuration and diagnostics... Display controls... _____________________________________________ Time & Date: System tag:

16:35:32 August 16, 2009 Emerson

3. Change to the “Analyzer zero” menu Press F3.

HOME ESCAPE ZERO SPAN

HFID_WO1000001

F1 F2 F3 F4 F5

6.28 ppmBasic Controls

Measurement range number: Range upper limit: Span gas concentration: Automatic range change control: Sample flow: Ranges with valid calibration: Calibration status: Flame condition: Light Flame...

1

10.0 ppm 8.6 ppm Disabled

4296 ml/min 1&2&3&4

READY

ON

HAS64E-IM-SW39(1) [NGA-e (HFID-Software 3.9.x)] 08/10 NGA 2000 4 - 23

Page 42: Software Version 3.9 - Emerson€¦ · Software Version 3.9.x ... 3- 6 3.8.1 Control module manufacturing data ... This also includes a self-test of the analyzer(s) or analyzer module(s)

4. Commence zeroing. Press F3. Note: Pressing F2 will take you back to the “Basic Controls” menu.

HOME ESCAPE ZERO Prüf-Kal

HFID_WO1000001

F1 F2 F3 F4 F5

6.28 ppmAnalyzer zero

Are you sure? You must have zero gas flowing through the analyzer. Calibration time: Measurement range number: Calibration status: Error message for last zero:

7 s 1

READY CAL OK

Before calibration can begin, the following conditions must be met:

Zero gas must flow through the analyzer for a sufficient period of time. The measured value must be stable.

Each range can be zeroed separately, or all together. This preference can be set in the “Calibration parameters” menu (see chapter 5.1.2, page 5-13).

Abort Prüf-Kal

5. Zeroing in progress Note: To abort the procedure, press F2.

HFID_WO1000001

F1 F2 F3 F4 F5

3.02 ppmAnalyzer zero

Are you sure? You must have zero gas flowing through the analyzer. Calibration time: Measurement range number: Calibration status: Error message for last zero:

10 s 1

ZEROING - WAIT

CAL OK

4- 24 NGA 2000 HAS64E-IM-SW39(1) [NGA-e (HFID-Software 3.9.x)] 08/10

Page 43: Software Version 3.9 - Emerson€¦ · Software Version 3.9.x ... 3- 6 3.8.1 Control module manufacturing data ... This also includes a self-test of the analyzer(s) or analyzer module(s)

Basic controls: 4.2.1 Zeroing

HAS64E-IM-SW39(1) [NGA-e (HFID-Software 3.9.x)] 08/10 NGA 2000 4 - 25

6. Change to the main menu Press F1. Note: To span the analyzer directly after zeroing, press F2 to return to the “Basic Controls” menu and follow the instructions in chapter 4.2.2 from step 3 onwards.

HOME ESCAPE ZERO Prüf-Kal

HFID_WO1000001

F1 F2 F3 F4 F5

0.05 ppmAnalyzer zero

Are you sure? You must have zero gas flowing through the analyzer. Calibration time: Measurement range number: Calibration status: Error message for last zero:

17 s 1

READY CAL OK

7. Change to the single component display Press F1.

Measure Status... Channel Lock... MFG Data

HFID_WO1000001

F1 F2 F3 F4 F5

0.02 ppm-- Main Menu --

Analyzer basic controls (calibration) & setup... Analyzer and I/O, expert controls & setup... System configuration and diagnostics... Display controls... _____________________________________________ Time & Date: System tag:

16:40:38 August 16, 2009 Emerson

Display Status... Main... Channel BasicCal

8. The single component display after zeroing

HFID_WO1000001

F1 F2 F3 F4 F5

Sample pressure: Oven temperature: Flame status: Raw signal:

232.5 hPa 191 C

ON 531756

0.02 ppm THC

0 Range: 1 10

490 61

900000

50 47 100000

Page 44: Software Version 3.9 - Emerson€¦ · Software Version 3.9.x ... 3- 6 3.8.1 Control module manufacturing data ... This also includes a self-test of the analyzer(s) or analyzer module(s)

4- 26 NGA 2000 HAS64E-IM-SW39(1) [NGA-e (HFID-Software 3.9.x)] 08/10

Page 45: Software Version 3.9 - Emerson€¦ · Software Version 3.9.x ... 3- 6 3.8.1 Control module manufacturing data ... This also includes a self-test of the analyzer(s) or analyzer module(s)

Basic controls: 4.2.2 Spanning

1. Change to the main menu Press F3 or the → -key.

Display Status... Main... Channel BasicCal

HFID_WO1000001

F1 F2 F3 F4 F5

Sample pressure: Oven temperature: Flame status: Raw signal:

232.5 hPa 191 C

ON 531756

6.28 ppm THC

0 Range: 1 10

490 61

900000

50 47 100000

2. Change to the basic controls Press the ↵ -key or the → -key.

Measure Status... Channel Lock... MFG Data

HFID_WO1000001

F1 F2 F3 F4 F5

6.28 ppm-- Main Menu --

Analyzer basic controls (calibration) & setup... Analyzer and I/O, expert controls & setup... System configuration and diagnostics... Display controls... _____________________________________________ Time & Date: System tag:

16:35:32 August 16, 2009 Emerson

3. Change to the “Analyzer span” menu Press F4.

HOME ESCAPE ZERO SPAN

HFID_WO1000001

F1 F2 F3 F4 F5

6.28 ppmBasic Controls

Measurement range number: Range upper limit: Span gas concentration: Automatic range change control: Sample flow: Ranges with valid calibration: Calibration status: Flame condition: Light Flame...

2

100 ppm 96 ppm

Disabled 4296 ml/min

1&2&3&4 READY

ON

HAS64E-IM-SW39(1) [NGA-e (HFID-Software 3.9.x)] 08/10 NGA 2000 4 - 27

Page 46: Software Version 3.9 - Emerson€¦ · Software Version 3.9.x ... 3- 6 3.8.1 Control module manufacturing data ... This also includes a self-test of the analyzer(s) or analyzer module(s)

4. Commence spanning Press F4. Note: Pressing F2 will take you back to the “Basic Controls” menu.

HOME ESCAPE SPAN

HFID_WO1000001

F1 F2 F3 F4 F5

6.28 ppmAnalyzer span

Are you sure? You must have span gas flowing through the analyzer. Calibration time: Measurement range number: Calibration status: Error message for last span:

10 s 2

READY CAL OK

Before calibration can begin, the following conditions must be met:

Span gas must flow through the analyzer for a sufficient period of time. The measured value must be stable.

Each range can be spanned separately, or all together. This preference can be set in the “Calibration parameters” menu (see chapter 5.1.2, page 5-13).

If it is not possible to calibrate all ranges with the same span gas, the ranges must be calibrated separately.

The span gas concentration must be between 10% and 110% of the upper limit of the current range. See chapter 5.1.1, page 5-5.

Abort

5. Spanning in progress Note: To abort the procedure, press F2.

HFID_WO1000001

F1 F2 F3 F4 F5

8.14 ppmAnalyzer span

Are you sure? You must have span gas flowing through the analyzer. Calibration time:

10 s Measurement range number: Calibration status: Error message for last span:

2

SPANNING - WAIT CAL OK

4- 28 NGA 2000 HAS64E-IM-SW39(1) [NGA-e (HFID-Software 3.9.x)] 08/10

Page 47: Software Version 3.9 - Emerson€¦ · Software Version 3.9.x ... 3- 6 3.8.1 Control module manufacturing data ... This also includes a self-test of the analyzer(s) or analyzer module(s)

Basic controls: 4.2.2 Spanning

6. Change to the main menu Press F1.

HOME ESCAPE SPAN

HFID_WO1000001

F1 F2 F3 F4 F5

9.76 ppmAnalyzer span

Are you sure? You must have span gas flowing through the analyzer. Calibration time: Measurement range number: Calibration status: Error message for last span:

18 s 2

READY CAL OK

7. Change to the single component display Press F1.

Measure Status... Channel Lock... MFG Data

HFID_WO1000001

F1 F2 F3 F4 F5

9.76 ppm-- Main Menu --

Analyzer basic controls (calibration) & setup... Analyzer and I/O, expert controls & setup... System configuration and diagnostics... Display controls... _____________________________________________ Time & Date: System tag:

16:42:38 August 16, 2009 Emerson

Display Status... Main... Channel BasicCal

8. The single component display after spanning

HFID_WO1000001

F1 F2 F3 F4 F5

Sample pressure: Oven temperature: Flame status: Raw signal:

232.5 hPa 191 C

ON 615219

9.76 ppm THC

0 Range: 1 10

490 61

900000

50 47 100000

HAS64E-IM-SW39(1) [NGA-e (HFID-Software 3.9.x)] 08/10 NGA 2000 4 - 29

Page 48: Software Version 3.9 - Emerson€¦ · Software Version 3.9.x ... 3- 6 3.8.1 Control module manufacturing data ... This also includes a self-test of the analyzer(s) or analyzer module(s)

4- 30 NGA 2000 HAS64E-IM-SW39(1) [NGA-e (HFID-Software 3.9.x)] 08/10

Page 49: Software Version 3.9 - Emerson€¦ · Software Version 3.9.x ... 3- 6 3.8.1 Control module manufacturing data ... This also includes a self-test of the analyzer(s) or analyzer module(s)

Analyzer and I/O, expert controls & setup: 5 Introduction

Main menu ↓

Analyzer and I/O, expert controls & setup ↓

Measure Channel Back...

HFID_WO1000001

F1 F2 F3 F4 F5

6.28 ppm-- Analyzer and I/O, Expert Controls & Setup --

Analyzer module controls... System & network I/O module controls... Analyzer module setup... System & network I/O module setup... (Note: Controls & setup are identical for MLT/TFID)

From the main menu, pressing the ↵ -key or the → -key in the line “Analyzer and I/O, expert controls & setup” accesses this menu, from which several submenus lead to options for setting measurement and calibration parameters for the analyzer or analyzer modules, as well as for configuring additional modules. The significance of different submenus may vary depending on the configuration of the NGA-2000 system.

Menu items:

“Analyzer module controls” submenu Zero and span calibration Measurement range settings Lighting the flame

Ch. 5.3, page 5-57

“System & network I/O module controls” submenu Configure SIO or DIO modules connected to the analyzer or platform

Ch. 5.2, page 5-37

“Analyzer module setup” submenu Set measurement and calibration parameters Set linearizer parameters

Ch. 5.1, page 5-3

“System & network I/O module setup” submenu Configure network I/O modules

Ch. 5.2, page 5-37

HAS64E-IM-SW39(1) [NGA-e (HFID-Software 3.9.x)] 08/10 NGA 2000 5 - 1

Page 50: Software Version 3.9 - Emerson€¦ · Software Version 3.9.x ... 3- 6 3.8.1 Control module manufacturing data ... This also includes a self-test of the analyzer(s) or analyzer module(s)

The submenus “System & network I/O module controls” and “...setup” are identical for the HFID module. Options in these areas are available not just for the HFID module but for any modules connected to the network. In some cases, different options may be available in each area (“...controls” or “...setup”). For further information please consult the manual for the module or contact our customer services.

Changing to a submenu: ⇒ Press the ↑ -key or the ↓ -key until the appropriate menu item is displayed against a

black background. ⇒ Press the ↵ -key or the → -key to change to the submenu.

Structure of chapter 5: All menus which must be navigated through to reach a specific submenu are listed vertically. At the end of the “breadcrumb” list, the menu is illustrated, following which explanations and instructions, which may themselves contain illustrations, are to be found.

Example: The concentrations of zero and span gas for each measurement range are to be set.

Main menu ↓

Analyzer and I/O, expert controls & setup ↓

Analyzer module setup ↓

Calibration gas list ↓

HOME ESCAPE

HFID_WO1000001

F1 F2 F3 F4 F5

6.28 ppmCalibration Gas List

Zero gas - range 1: Span gas - range 1: Zero gas - range 2:

0.00 ppm 8.6 ppm

0.00 ppm Span gas - range 2: Zero gas - range 3: Span gas - range 3: Zero gas - range 4: Span gas - range 4: Calibration gas HC response factor: Operational sample pressure: Calibration...

96 ppm 0.00 ppm 990 ppm

0.00 ppm 9240 ppm

1.00 241 hPa

In this menu the values for the concentrations of zero gas and span gas for the calibration of all ranges can be set...

Further instructions follow…

5- 2 NGA 2000 HAS64E-IM-SW39(1) [NGA-e (HFID-Software 3.9.x)] 08/10

Page 51: Software Version 3.9 - Emerson€¦ · Software Version 3.9.x ... 3- 6 3.8.1 Control module manufacturing data ... This also includes a self-test of the analyzer(s) or analyzer module(s)

Analyzer and I/O, expert controls & setup: 5.1 Analyzer module setup

Main menu ↓

Analyzer and I/O, expert controls & setup ↓

Analyzer module setup ↓

HOME ESCAPE

HFID_WO1000001

F1 F2 F3 F4 F5

6.28 ppmAnalyzer module set up

Calibration gas list... Calibration Parameters... Concentration alarm setup... Gas measurement parameters... Analyzer parameter list... Physical measurement parameters... Displayed parameters... Analyzer tag:

HFID_WO1000001

From this menu various submenus are available, in which measurement and calibration parameters of the HFID analyzer module and the display parameters of the single component display can be set.

Menu items:

“Calibration gas list” submenu Set zero and span calibration gas concentrations

Ch. 5.1.1, page 5-5.

“Calibration Parameters” submenu Set further parameters for zero and span calibration

Ch. 5.1.2, page 5-13.

“Concentration alarm setup” submenu Configure concentration alarms

Ch. 5.1.3, page 5-15.

“Gas measurement parameters” submenu Configure settings for measurement ranges, units and linearization

Ch. 5.1.4, page 5-17.

“Analyzer parameter list” submenu A summary of various parameters: displayed parameters, concentration parameters, linearization parameters etc.

Ch. 5.1.5, page 5-33

HAS64E-IM-SW39(1) [NGA-e (HFID-Software 3.9.x)] 08/10 NGA 2000 5 - 3

Page 52: Software Version 3.9 - Emerson€¦ · Software Version 3.9.x ... 3- 6 3.8.1 Control module manufacturing data ... This also includes a self-test of the analyzer(s) or analyzer module(s)

5- 4 NGA 2000 HAS64E-IM-SW39(1) [NGA-e (HFID-Software 3.9.x)] 08/10

“Physical measurement parameters” submenu Information about various measurement parameters

Ch. 6.1.2.3, page 6-13

“Displayed parameters” submenu Configure settings for the four additional parameters displayed in the single component display

Ch. 5.1.6, page 5-35

“Analyzer tag” parameter The analyzer tag can be set to any value with a maximum of 30 characters.

A change in this setting must be borne in mind when configuring the programmable I/Os, if the HFID module is part of an analyzer network.

Changing the analyzer tag ⇒ Press the ↑ -key or the ↓ -key until the “Analyzer tag” item is displayed against a black

background. ⇒ Select the item by pressing the ↵ -key or the → -key. ⇒ Select the character to be edited by pressing the ← -key or the → -key. ⇒ Press the ↑ -key or the ↓ -key until the required character is shown. ⇒ Repeat the previous two steps until the required tag is complete. ⇒ Confirm the new tag with the ↵ -key or cancel the changes and return to the previous

value by pressing F2 (Back). The following characters are available:

Letters A to Z and a to z Digits 0 to 9 The following characters: ↑ ↓ → ← ∟ ↔ ▲ ▼ ! " # $ % & ´ ( ) * + , - . / ; < = > ? @ [ \ ]

^ _ ` { ¦ } ~ Ç ü é á ä à â ç ê ë è ï î ì Ä Â É ff ô ö ò û ù ÿ Ö Ü ¢ £ ¥ × ƒ đ ñ © ß and the space character

Changing to a submenu ⇒ Press the ↑ -key or the ↓ -key until the appropriate menu item is displayed against a

black background. ⇒ Press the ↵ -key or the → -key to change to the submenu.

Page 53: Software Version 3.9 - Emerson€¦ · Software Version 3.9.x ... 3- 6 3.8.1 Control module manufacturing data ... This also includes a self-test of the analyzer(s) or analyzer module(s)

Analyzer and I/O, expert controls & setup: 5.1.1 Calibration gas list

Main menu ↓

Analyzer and I/O, expert controls & setup ↓

Analyzer module setup ↓

Calibration gas list ↓

HOME ESCAPE

HFID_WO1000001

F1 F2 F3 F4 F5

6.28 ppmCalibration Gas List

Zero gas - range 1: Span gas - range 1: Zero gas - range 2: Span gas - range 2: Zero gas - range 3: Span gas - range 3: Zero gas - range 4: Span gas - range 4: Calibration gas HC response factor: Operational sample pressure: Calibration...

0.00 ppm 8.6 ppm

0.00 ppm 96 ppm

0.00 ppm 990 ppm

0.00 ppm 9240 ppm

1.00 241 hPa

In this menu the values for the concentrations of zero gas and span gas for the calibration of all ranges can be set. In the “Calibration” submenu the zero and span gas calibrations can be started.

Menu items

“Zero gas - range 1/2/3/4” and “Span gas - range 1/2/3/4” submenus The desired values for the concentrations of zero gas and span gas can be set in these lines. Please read the notes below!

“Calibration gas HC response factor” parameter In this line the response factor for the hydrocarbon calibration can be set. The value depends on the gas to be measured. Please read the notes below!

“Operational sample pressure” parameter The desired value for the operational pressure of the sample gas can be set in this line. The value depends on the type of capillaries used.

“Calibration” submenu Accesses the “Zero/span calibration” submenu, in which the zero and span calibration can be started and, if necessary, calibration factors manually set.

Page 5-7

Setting concentration values for zero and span gas concentrations ⇒ Press the ↑ -key or the ↓ -key until the appropriate menu item is displayed against a

black background. ⇒ Select the item by pressing the ↵ -key or the → -key.

HAS64E-IM-SW39(1) [NGA-e (HFID-Software 3.9.x)] 08/10 NGA 2000 5 - 5

Page 54: Software Version 3.9 - Emerson€¦ · Software Version 3.9.x ... 3- 6 3.8.1 Control module manufacturing data ... This also includes a self-test of the analyzer(s) or analyzer module(s)

⇒ Set the new value with the ↑ -key or the ↓ -key. A single digit can be selected using the ← -key or the → -key.

⇒ Confirm the new value with the ↵ -key or cancel the changes and return to the previous value by pressing F2 (Back).

Each range can be spanned separately or all together. If it is not possible to calibrate all ranges with the same span gas, the ranges must be calibrated separately. The value for the span gas concentration must be between 10% and 110% of the upper limit of the individual range for calibration to be possible. For example:

Range Upper limit Possible concentrations

1 10 ppm 1 ppm to 11 ppm

2 100 ppm 10 ppm to 110 ppm

3 1000 ppm 100 ppm to 1100 ppm

4 10000 ppm 1000 ppm to 11000 ppm

Setting the HC response factor ⇒ Press the ↑ -key or the ↓ -key until the “Calibration gas HC response factor” item is

displayed against a black background. ⇒ Select the item by pressing the ↵ -key or the → -key. ⇒ Set the new value with the ↑ -key or the ↓ -key. A single digit can be selected using the

← -key or the → -key. ⇒ Confirm the new value with the ↵ -key or cancel the changes and return to the previous

value by pressing F2 (Back). The value to be entered here depends on the sample gas. Typical values are 1.00 for methane (CH4) or 3.14 for propane (C3H8). If an incorrect value is entered here, the HFID will calculate an incorrect measurement value.

Setting the operational sample pressure ⇒ Press the ↑ -key or the ↓ -key until the “Operational sample pressure” item is displayed

against a black background. ⇒ Select the item by pressing the ↵ -key or the → -key. ⇒ Set the new value with the ↑ -key or the ↓ -key. A single digit can be selected using the

← -key or the → -key. ⇒ Confirm the new value with the ↵ -key or cancel the changes and return to the previous

value by pressing F2 (Back). The operational sample pressure depends on the type of capillaries in use. Typical values are 240hpa or (140 to 340hpa).

5- 6 NGA 2000 HAS64E-IM-SW39(1) [NGA-e (HFID-Software 3.9.x)] 08/10

Page 55: Software Version 3.9 - Emerson€¦ · Software Version 3.9.x ... 3- 6 3.8.1 Control module manufacturing data ... This also includes a self-test of the analyzer(s) or analyzer module(s)

Analyzer and I/O, expert controls & setup: 5.1.1 Calibration gas list

Changing to the “Zero/span calibration” submenu ⇒ Press the ↑ -key or the ↓ -key until the “Calibration” item is displayed against a black

background. ⇒ Press the ↵ -key or the → -key to change to the submenu.

Zero/span calibration

HOME FACTORS ZERO SPAN

HFID_WO1000001

F1 F2 F3 F4 F5

6.28 ppmZero/span calibration

Measurement range number: Zero gas concentration: Span gas concentration: Sample flow: Flame condition: Raw measurement signal: Status: Result... Calibration adjustment limits:

1 0.0 ppm 8.6 ppm

4296 ml/min ON

532876

READY

ENABLED

This menu shows parameters relevant to calibration for each measurement range. In this menu zero and span calibration can be started and the results of the last calibration displayed. If calibration proves difficult, calibration can be performed manually.

Menu items and function keys:

“Measurement range number” parameter Shows which range the following parameters relate to. To see the parameters for other ranges, this parameter must be set accordingly.

“Zero gas concentration” and “Span gas concentration” parameters Show the values set for zero and span gas concentrations.

“Bypass sample flow” parameter This line shows the current flow (between 4000 and 5000 ml/min).

“Flame condition” parameter Shows whether the flame is lit (ON) or not (OFF).

“Status” parameter Shows the current status of the unit.

“Result” submenu Accesses the “Zero/span diagnostic data” submenu, showing the results of the last zero and span calibrations.

HAS64E-IM-SW39(1) [NGA-e (HFID-Software 3.9.x)] 08/10 NGA 2000 5 - 7

Page 56: Software Version 3.9 - Emerson€¦ · Software Version 3.9.x ... 3- 6 3.8.1 Control module manufacturing data ... This also includes a self-test of the analyzer(s) or analyzer module(s)

“Calibration adjustment limits” parameter If this parameter is set to “ENABLED”, the calibration will only be accepted as valid if the result lies within the set limits. If this parameter is set to “DISABLED”, it will be possible to calibrate even if the result lies outside these limits. See also chapter 5.1.2, page 5-13.

“FACTORS” function key (F2) Accesses the “Calibration factors” submenu to allow the manual setting of calibration factors.

Page 5-9.

“ZERO” (F3) and “SPAN” (F4) function keys Commence zeroing and spanning. (See below.)

Changing the measurement range ⇒ Press the ↑ -key or the ↓ -key until the “Operational sample pressure” item is displayed

against a black background. ⇒ Select the item by pressing the ↵ -key or the → -key. ⇒ Set the new value with the ↑ -key or the ↓ -key (1 to 4). ⇒ Confirm the new value with the ↵ -key or cancel the changes and return to the previous

value by pressing F2 (Back).

Enabling and disabling calibration adjustment limits ⇒ Press the ↑ -key or the ↓ -key until the “Calibration adjustment limits” item is displayed

against a black background. ⇒ Select the item by pressing the ↵ -key or the → -key. ⇒ Set the value to “ENABLED” or “DISABLED” with the ↑ -key or the ↓ -key. ⇒ Confirm the new value with the ↵ -key or cancel the changes and return to the previous

value by pressing F2 (Back).

Changing to the “Zero/span diagnostic data” submenu ⇒ Press the ↑ -key or the ↓ -key until the “Result” item is displayed against a black

background. ⇒ Press the ↵ -key or the → -key to change to the submenu.

Zeroing and spanning Each measurement range must be zeroed and spanned. The procedure is the same in each case:

⇒ Select the range to be calibrated (as described above). ⇒ Press F3 (“ZERO”) or F4 (“SPAN”) to change to the “Analyzer zero” or “Analyzer span”

submenu. Read the notes displayed on screen! ⇒ Allow zero or span gas to flow through the HFID. ⇒ When the measurement value is stable (as displayed in the top right of the screen),

commence calibration by pressing F3 or F4. See ch. 4.2.1, page 4-23, or ch. 4.2.2, page 4-27.

5- 8 NGA 2000 HAS64E-IM-SW39(1) [NGA-e (HFID-Software 3.9.x)] 08/10

Page 57: Software Version 3.9 - Emerson€¦ · Software Version 3.9.x ... 3- 6 3.8.1 Control module manufacturing data ... This also includes a self-test of the analyzer(s) or analyzer module(s)

Analyzer and I/O, expert controls & setup: 5.1.1 Calibration gas list

⇒ When the calibration is complete, press F2 (Back) or the ← -key to return to the “Zero/span calibration” menu.

⇒ Change to the “Zero/span diagnostic data” submenu (via the “Result” menu item) to check the results of the calibration.

Entering calibration values manually If a calibration attempt fails, e.g. due to interruptions in the gas supply, the calibration procedure must be repeated. The recorded zero and span gas values may be so extreme, that a simple repetition of the calibration procedure may not be enough to solve the problem. In such cases the calibration factors must be entered manually.

Conditions for the manual setting of factors:

In the “Zero/span calibration” menu the “Calibration adjustment limits” parameter (see above) must be set to “DISABLED”.

In the “Calibration parameters” menu (see ch. 5.1.2, page 5-13) the “Zero ranges” and “Span ranges” must be set to “SEPARATELY”.

⇒ In the “Zero/span calibration” menu press F2 (“Factors”) to access the “Calibration factors” menu:

HOME ESCAPE

HFID_WO1000001

F1 F2 F3 F4 F5

6.28 ppmCalibration Factors

Only those factors appropriate for the current rwill affect the reading on the current range. Make sure you are using the right ones! Measurement range number: Range 1 factors... Range 2 factors... Range 3 factors... Range 4 factors...

1

ange

⇒ Set the required measurement range number (as described above). ⇒ Change to the appropriate submenu (“Range N factors”) by pressing the ↑ -key or the ↓ -

key until the appropriate menu item is displayed against a black background and then pressing the ↵ -key or the → -key:

HAS64E-IM-SW39(1) [NGA-e (HFID-Software 3.9.x)] 08/10 NGA 2000 5 - 9

Page 58: Software Version 3.9 - Emerson€¦ · Software Version 3.9.x ... 3- 6 3.8.1 Control module manufacturing data ... This also includes a self-test of the analyzer(s) or analyzer module(s)

HOME STORE NEXT HISTORY

HFID_WO1000001

F1 F2 F3 F4 F5

6.28 ppmRange 1 Factors

Zero offset: Span factor: Full scale range at calibration: Measurement range number: Raw measurement signal:

536102.0 0.000053956

10.0 ppm 1

536839.0

⇒ If necessary adjust the values of the “Zero offset” for zero calibration and “Span factor”

for span calibration. For zero gas the values of the “Zero offset” and “Raw measurement signal” should be identical.

⇒ The “Zero offset” parameter is used to set the zero point to zero, and the “Span factor” parameter is used to bring the measured value to the actual concentration value of the span gas. Changes can be observed in real time (top right of screen).

⇒ These values must be set for each measurement range. To adjust the factors for the next range, press F3 (“Next” or “First”).

After setting these values, the unit must be zeroed and spanned normally.

Adjusting values ⇒ Press the ↑ -key or the ↓ -key until the appropriate menu item is displayed against a

black background. ⇒ Select the item by pressing the ↵ -key or the → -key. ⇒ Set the new value with the ↑ -key or the ↓ -key. A single digit can be selected using the

← -key or the → -key. ⇒ Confirm the new value with the ↵ -key or cancel the changes and return to the previous

value by pressing F2 (Back).

Saving the factors The factors entered in this way can be saved for each measurement range.

⇒ Press F2 (“Store”) in the “Range N Factors” submenu. The factors for all ranges will be saved.

Recalling saved factors For each measurement range previously saved factors can be recalled. Two values are stored for each factor: the value saved as described above and the original manufacturer’s setting.

⇒ Press F4 (“History”) in the “Range N Factors” menu. The following submenu will be displayed:

5- 10 NGA 2000 HAS64E-IM-SW39(1) [NGA-e (HFID-Software 3.9.x)] 08/10

Page 59: Software Version 3.9 - Emerson€¦ · Software Version 3.9.x ... 3- 6 3.8.1 Control module manufacturing data ... This also includes a self-test of the analyzer(s) or analyzer module(s)

Analyzer and I/O, expert controls & setup: 5.1.1 Calibration gas list

HOME NEXT RSTR MN RSTR ST

HFID_WO1000001

F1 F2 F3 F4 F5

6.28 ppmRange 1 Factors

Manufacturer's settings Zero offset: Span factor:

Stored settings Zero offset: Span factor:

528510.6

0.000004251

528620.0 0.000004149

⇒ Pressing F3 (“RSTR MN”) recalls the manufacturer’s settings and enters them as the

factors for all ranges. Pressing F4 (“RSTR ST”) recalls the settings saved as described above and enters them as the factors for all ranges.

HAS64E-IM-SW39(1) [NGA-e (HFID-Software 3.9.x)] 08/10 NGA 2000 5 - 11

Page 60: Software Version 3.9 - Emerson€¦ · Software Version 3.9.x ... 3- 6 3.8.1 Control module manufacturing data ... This also includes a self-test of the analyzer(s) or analyzer module(s)

5- 12 NGA 2000 HAS64E-IM-SW39(1) [NGA-e (HFID-Software 3.9.x)] 08/10

Page 61: Software Version 3.9 - Emerson€¦ · Software Version 3.9.x ... 3- 6 3.8.1 Control module manufacturing data ... This also includes a self-test of the analyzer(s) or analyzer module(s)

Analyzer and I/O, expert controls & setup: 5.1.2 Calibration parameters

Main menu ↓

Analyzer and I/O, expert controls & setup ↓

Analyzer module setup ↓

Calibration parameters ↓

HOME ESCAPE

HFID_WO1000001

F1 F2 F3 F4 F5

6.28 ppmCalibration Parameters

Calibration adjustment limits: Calibration averaging time: Calibration failure alarm: Cal failure error allowed: Calibration time out: Purge time: Zero ranges: Span ranges:

ENABLED

5 s No

50 % 60 s

0 s SEPARATELY SEPARATELY

In this menu various additional parameters can be set for zero and span calibration processes.

Menu items

“Calibration adjustment limits” parameter If this parameter is set to “ENABLED”, calibration will only be successful if the result lies within the set limits. If the result lies outside these limits, an error message will be displayed in the “Analyzer zero” and/or “Analyzer span” menu. If this parameter is set to “DISABLED”, calibration will be possible even if the results lie outside the set limits. This setting necessary e.g. when calibration is to be performed manually (see chapter 5.1.1, page 5-9).

“Calibration averaging time” parameter Determines the time span the analyzer uses to obtain the calibration average. Longer times should result in more accurate results. The value can be set to any value between 0 and 60 seconds. The default value is 5 seconds.

“Calibration failure alarm” parameter If this parameter is set to “Yes”, a failed calibration will cause a warning to be issued.

“Cal failure allowed” parameter If the set point differs by a greater margin than that is set here, a warning will be issued if the calibration failure alarm is also enabled. The value can be set to any value between 5% and 80%; the default value is 50%.

HAS64E-IM-SW39(1) [NGA-e (HFID-Software 3.9.x)] 08/10 NGA 2000 5 - 13

Page 62: Software Version 3.9 - Emerson€¦ · Software Version 3.9.x ... 3- 6 3.8.1 Control module manufacturing data ... This also includes a self-test of the analyzer(s) or analyzer module(s)

5- 14 NGA 2000 HAS64E-IM-SW39(1) [NGA-e (HFID-Software 3.9.x)] 08/10

“Calibration time out” parameter If the measurement signal is not stable after the time out set here, a warning will be issued if the calibration failure alarm is also enabled. The value can be set to any value between 0 and 300 seconds, the default value is 60 seconds.

“Zero ranges” and “Span ranges” parameters Determine whether measurement ranges should be zeroed or spanned together or separately. If this value is set to “TOGETHER”, all ranges are automatically calibrated in turn. If the ranges are to be calibrated manually (see chapter 5.1.1, page 5-9), these parameters must be set to “SEPARATELY”.

It is only possible to calibrate ranges together when the concentration of a single span gas lies within 10% and 110% of the upper limit of each range. If this is not the case, only those ranges which meet this criterion will be calibrated automatically; all others will be ignored.

Setting values ⇒ Press the ↑ -key or the ↓ -key until the appropriate menu item is displayed against a

black background. ⇒ Select the item by pressing the ↵ -key or the → -key. ⇒ Set the new value with the ↑ -key or the ↓ -key. A single digit can be selected using the

← -key or the → -key. ⇒ Confirm the new value with the ↵ -key or cancel the changes and return to the previous

value by pressing F2 (Back).

Page 63: Software Version 3.9 - Emerson€¦ · Software Version 3.9.x ... 3- 6 3.8.1 Control module manufacturing data ... This also includes a self-test of the analyzer(s) or analyzer module(s)

Analyzer and I/O, expert controls & setup: 5.1.3 Concentration alarm setup

Main menu ↓

Analyzer and I/O, expert controls & setup ↓

Analyzer module setup ↓

Concentration alarm setup ↓

HOME ESCAPE ACKN

HFID_WO1000001

F1 F2 F3 F4 F5

6.28 ppmConcentration Alarm Setup

Alarm generation is: Level for Low-Low alarm: Level for Low alarm: Level for High alarm: Level for High-High alarm: Alarm delay: Low-Low alarm: Low alarm: High alarm: High-High alarm:

On

0.000 ppm 0.000 ppm 4.000 ppm 8.000 ppm

1.0 s Off Off On Off

In this menu the levels for the concentration alarms can be set.

Menu items and function keys

“Alarm generation is” parameter Switches all alarms on or off. Possible values are:

Off: No alarms are generated. On: Alarms are generated only for as long as the gas concentration remains above or

below the set levels. On (Hold alarm): Alarms are generated when the gas concentration goes above or

below the set limits and continue to be given until the alarm is acknowledged.

“Level for...” parameters Set levels for the four different alarms. The Low and Low-Low alarms are issued when the concentration drops below the set limits, the High and High-High alarms are issued when the concentration rises above the set limits.

“Alarm delay” parameter Determines for how long the concentration must lie above or below the set levels before an alarm is issued. The value can be set to between 0 and 30 seconds, the default value is 1 second.

“Low-Low alarm”, “Low alarm”, “High alarm” and “High-High alarm” parameters Indicate which alarms are currently being issued.

“ACKN” function key (F3) Acknowledges and resets the alarm.

HAS64E-IM-SW39(1) [NGA-e (HFID-Software 3.9.x)] 08/10 NGA 2000 5 - 15

Page 64: Software Version 3.9 - Emerson€¦ · Software Version 3.9.x ... 3- 6 3.8.1 Control module manufacturing data ... This also includes a self-test of the analyzer(s) or analyzer module(s)

5- 16 NGA 2000 HAS64E-IM-SW39(1) [NGA-e (HFID-Software 3.9.x)] 08/10

Adjusting values ⇒ Press the ↑ -key or the ↓ -key until the appropriate menu item is displayed against a

black background. ⇒ Select the item by pressing the ↵ -key or the → -key. ⇒ Set the new value with the ↑ -key or the ↓ -key. A single digit can be selected using the

← -key or the → -key. ⇒ Confirm the new value with the ↵ -key or cancel the changes and return to the previous

value by pressing F2 (Back).

Page 65: Software Version 3.9 - Emerson€¦ · Software Version 3.9.x ... 3- 6 3.8.1 Control module manufacturing data ... This also includes a self-test of the analyzer(s) or analyzer module(s)

Analyzer and I/O, expert controls & setup: 5.1.4 Gas measurement parameters

Main menu

Analyzer and I/O, expert controls & setup

Analyzer module setup

Gas measurement parameters

HOME ESCAPE

HFID_WO1000001

F1 F2 F3 F4 F5

6.28 ppmGas measurement Parameters

Linearization parameters... Response time/delay parameters... Range setting... Automatic range control... Linearization functions... Units… Oven temperature set point: 191.0 C Oven temperature: 189.9 C

From this menu further submenus can be accessed in which parameters relating to the measurement ranges, measurement units and linearization can be set.

Menu items

“Linearizations parameters” submenu Settings for the linearizations of measurement results.

Ch. 5.1.4.1, p. 5-19

“Response time/delay parameters” submenu Settings for the analyzer response time and output delay.

Ch. 5.1.4.2, p. 5-23

“Range setting” submenu Adjust lower and upper limits for each measurement range.

Ch. 5.1.4.3, p. 5-25

“Automatic range change control” submenu Settings for the automatic range change.

Ch. 5.1.4.4, p. 5-27

“Units” submenu Select measurement units for display.

Ch. 5.1.4.5, p. 5-29

HAS64E-IM-SW39(1) [NGA-e (HFID-Software 3.9.x)] 08/10 NGA 2000 5 - 17

Page 66: Software Version 3.9 - Emerson€¦ · Software Version 3.9.x ... 3- 6 3.8.1 Control module manufacturing data ... This also includes a self-test of the analyzer(s) or analyzer module(s)

5- 18 NGA 2000 HAS64E-IM-SW39(1) [NGA-e (HFID-Software 3.9.x)] 08/10

“Linearization functions” submenu Optimize the linearization functions.

Ch. 5.1.4.6, p. 5-31

Changing to a submenu Press the -key or the -key until the appropriate menu item is displayed against a black background.

Press the -key or the -key to change to the submenu.

Page 67: Software Version 3.9 - Emerson€¦ · Software Version 3.9.x ... 3- 6 3.8.1 Control module manufacturing data ... This also includes a self-test of the analyzer(s) or analyzer module(s)

Analyzer and I/O, expert controls & setup: 5.1.4.1 Linearization parameters

Main menu ↓

Analyzer and I/O, expert controls & setup ↓

Analyzer module setup ↓

Gas measurement parameters ↓

Linearization parameters ↓

HOME ESCAPE

HFID_WO1000001

F1 F2 F3 F4 F5

6.28 ppmLinearization parameters

Range 1 linearizer: If enabled, use curve no.: Range 2 linearizer: If enabled, use curve no.: Range 3 linearizer: If enabled use curve no.: Range 4 linearizer: If enabled, use curve no.: Set linearity coefficients...

DISABLED

1 DISABLED

2 DISABLED

3 DISABLED

4

In this menu the linearizer can be enabled for each measurement range and the linearity curve set.

Note: The HFID generally operates linearly over all ranges. It should therefore never be necessary to use the linearizer.

Menu items

“Range 1/2/3/4 linearizer” parameters The linearizer can be enabled or disabled for each measurement range. Before determining the data required for a linearization, these parameters must be set to “DISABLED” in order to avoid interference from previously set values.

“If enabled, uses curve no...” parameters One of four linearity curves, as configured in the “Set linearity coefficients” submenu (see below), can be selected for each range.

“Set linearity coefficients” submenu Configure the linearity curves.

Page 5-20

HAS64E-IM-SW39(1) [NGA-e (HFID-Software 3.9.x)] 08/10 NGA 2000 5 - 19

Page 68: Software Version 3.9 - Emerson€¦ · Software Version 3.9.x ... 3- 6 3.8.1 Control module manufacturing data ... This also includes a self-test of the analyzer(s) or analyzer module(s)

Adjusting settings ⇒ Press the ↑ -key or the ↓ -key until the appropriate menu item is displayed against a

black background. ⇒ Select the item by pressing the ↵ -key or the → -key. ⇒ Set the new value with the ↑ -key or the ↓ -key. ⇒ Confirm the new value with the ↵ -key or cancel the changes and return to the previous

value by pressing F2 (Back).

Changing to the “Set linearity coefficients” submenu ⇒ Press the ↑ -key or the ↓ -key until the “Set linearity coefficients” item is displayed

against a black background. ⇒ Press the ↵ -key or the → -key to change to the submenu.

“Set linearity coefficients” submenu The “Set linearity coefficients” menu item accesses the following menu:

HOME ESCAPE NEXT LAST

HFID_WO1000001

F1 F2 F3 F4 F5

6.28 ppmSet linearity coefficients

Curve 1 A0 coefficient: A1 coefficient:

0.000000 1.000000 0.000000 0.000000 0.000000 10.0 ppm

5.0 % 5.0 %

DISABLED

A2 coefficient: A3 coefficient: A4 coefficient: Curve upper limit: Curve over-range: Curve under-range: Status:

In this menu the required coefficients for the linearity curves can be set. To browse through the four curves, press F3 (“Next”). The current curve number is shown in the menu title.

Menu items

“A0/A1/A2/A3/A4 coefficient” parameters Set the coefficients for the current curve.

“Curve upper limit” parameter This should be set to the upper limit of the range for which the current curve is selected in the “Linearization parameters” menu.

“Curve over-range” and “Curve under-range” parameters These two parameters determine by how much (in per cent) the linearity curve should lie above or below the measurement range.

5- 20 NGA 2000 HAS64E-IM-SW39(1) [NGA-e (HFID-Software 3.9.x)] 08/10

Page 69: Software Version 3.9 - Emerson€¦ · Software Version 3.9.x ... 3- 6 3.8.1 Control module manufacturing data ... This also includes a self-test of the analyzer(s) or analyzer module(s)

Analyzer and I/O, expert controls & setup: 5.1.4.1 Linearization parameters

“Status” parameter Disables or enables the current curve.

Adjusting settings ⇒ Press the ↑ -key or the ↓ -key until the appropriate menu item is displayed against a

black background. ⇒ Select the item by pressing the ↵ -key or the → -key. ⇒ Set the new value with the ↑ -key or the ↓ -key. A single digit can be selected using the

← -key or the → -key. ⇒ Confirm the new value with the ↵ -key or cancel the changes and return to the previous

value by pressing F2 (Back).

Optimizing the linearizer The linearizer can be optimized with a midpoint correction. See chapter 5.1.4.6 “Linearization functions”, page 5-31.

HAS64E-IM-SW39(1) [NGA-e (HFID-Software 3.9.x)] 08/10 NGA 2000 5 - 21

Page 70: Software Version 3.9 - Emerson€¦ · Software Version 3.9.x ... 3- 6 3.8.1 Control module manufacturing data ... This also includes a self-test of the analyzer(s) or analyzer module(s)

5- 22 NGA 2000 HAS64E-IM-SW39(1) [NGA-e (HFID-Software 3.9.x)] 08/10

Page 71: Software Version 3.9 - Emerson€¦ · Software Version 3.9.x ... 3- 6 3.8.1 Control module manufacturing data ... This also includes a self-test of the analyzer(s) or analyzer module(s)

Analyzer and I/O, expert controls & setup: 5.1.4.2 Response time/delay parameters

Main menu ↓

Analyzer and I/O, expert controls & setup ↓

Analyzer module setup ↓

Gas measurement parameters ↓

Response time/delay parameters ↓

HOME ESCAPE

HFID_WO1000001

F1 F2 F3 F4 F5

6.28 ppmResponse time/delay parameters

Range 1 t90 time: Range 2 t90 time: Range 3 t90 time: Range 4 t90 time: LON update rate: Output delay time:

0.5 s 0.5 s 0.5 s 0.5 s

10 per sec

0.0 s

In this menu the response time (t90-time) of the analyzer can be set for each measurement range, and the output delay time for the measurement signal can also be configured.

Menu items

“Range 1/2/3/4 t90 time” parameters The t90 time is the time which elapses following a change in concentration before the analyzer shows 90% of the concentration. Any value between 0.1 and 30 seconds can be set.

“LON update rate” parameter This parameter determines how often the network variable should be updated per second. The following values can be set:

1 per sec 10 per sec ASAP (i.e., as soon as possible)

“Output delay time” parameter The measurement signal of a channel at the analog output can be delayed by a certain amount of time. Setting a suitable value here will allow signals of various channels to be observed to change simultaneously. Any value can be set between 0 and 30 seconds. (See illustration on the right.)

Concentration

Channel 1

Channel 2

Channel 3

Time

HAS64E-IM-SW39(1) [NGA-e (HFID-Software 3.9.x)] 08/10 NGA 2000 5 - 23

Page 72: Software Version 3.9 - Emerson€¦ · Software Version 3.9.x ... 3- 6 3.8.1 Control module manufacturing data ... This also includes a self-test of the analyzer(s) or analyzer module(s)

5- 24 NGA 2000 HAS64E-IM-SW39(1) [NGA-e (HFID-Software 3.9.x)] 08/10

Adjusting settings ⇒ Press the ↑ -key or the ↓ -key until the appropriate menu item is displayed against a

black background. ⇒ Select the item by pressing the ↵ -key or the → -key. ⇒ Set the new value with the ↑ -key or the ↓ -key. A single digit can be selected using the

← -key or the → -key. ⇒ Confirm the new value with the ↵ -key or cancel the changes and return to the previous

value by pressing F2 (Back).

Page 73: Software Version 3.9 - Emerson€¦ · Software Version 3.9.x ... 3- 6 3.8.1 Control module manufacturing data ... This also includes a self-test of the analyzer(s) or analyzer module(s)

Analyzer and I/O, expert controls & setup: 5.1.4.3 Range setting

Main menu ↓

Analyzer and I/O, expert controls & setup ↓

Analyzer module setup ↓

Gas measurement parameters ↓

Range setting ↓

HOME ESCAPE

HFID_WO1000001

F1 F2 F3 F4 F5

6.28 ppmRange Setting

Minimum range: Maximum range: Range 1 lower limit: Range 1 upper limit: Range 2 lower limit: Range 2 upper limit: Range 3 lower limit: Range 3 upper limit: Range 4 lower limit: Range 4 upper limit:

10.0 ppm

1000 ppm 0.0 ppm 10 ppm

0.0 ppm 100 ppm 0.0 ppm

1000 ppm 0.0 ppm

10000 ppm

In this menu the lower and upper limits of each measurement range can be set.

Menu items

“Minimum range” and “Maximum range” parameters These parameters can only be set by the manufacturer. A range upper limit can be no smaller than the value of the minimum range and no more than the value of the maximum range.

“Range 1/2/3/4 lower limit” and “Range 1/2/3/4 upper limit” parameters A lower limit and an upper limit for each measurement range can be set here.

Adjusting settings ⇒ Press the ↑ -key or the ↓ -key until the appropriate menu item is displayed against a

black background. ⇒ Select the item by pressing the ↵ -key or the → -key. ⇒ Set the new value with the ↑ -key or the ↓ -key. A single digit can be selected using the

← -key or the → -key. ⇒ Confirm the new value with the ↵ -key or cancel the changes and return to the previous

value by pressing F2 (Back).

HAS64E-IM-SW39(1) [NGA-e (HFID-Software 3.9.x)] 08/10 NGA 2000 5 - 25

Page 74: Software Version 3.9 - Emerson€¦ · Software Version 3.9.x ... 3- 6 3.8.1 Control module manufacturing data ... This also includes a self-test of the analyzer(s) or analyzer module(s)

5- 26 NGA 2000 HAS64E-IM-SW39(1) [NGA-e (HFID-Software 3.9.x)] 08/10

Page 75: Software Version 3.9 - Emerson€¦ · Software Version 3.9.x ... 3- 6 3.8.1 Control module manufacturing data ... This also includes a self-test of the analyzer(s) or analyzer module(s)

Analyzer and I/O, expert controls & setup: 5.1.4.4 Automatic range change control

Main menu ↓

Analyzer and I/O, expert controls & setup ↓

Analyzer module setup ↓

Gas measurement parameters ↓

Automatic range control ↓

Measure Back...

HFID_WO1000001

F1 F2 F3 F4 F5

6.28 ppm-- Automatic Range Control --

Actual switch levels... Switch level hysteresis: Usage of range - 1: Usage of range - 2: Usage of range - 3: Usage of range - 4: Automatic range control: _____________________________________________ Absolute, range upper limit: Absolute, range lower limit:

20 % Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Disabled

1000 ppm 10.0 ppm

In this menu the automatic range change control can be configured. In this way the HFID can switch to a different measurement range whenever necessary.

Menu items

“Actual switch levels” submenu Changes to the “Actual switch levels” submenu. This shows the actual measurement levels at which the analyzer switches to a different range.

“Switch level hysteresis” parameter This parameter is set to a percentage value which determines by how much the measurement signal must lie below the next smallest range’s upper limit before switching to that range. For example: the upper limit of range 3 is set to 100 ppm, the switch level hysteresis to 20%. The analyzer only switches from range 4 to range 3 when the gas concentration is measured at less than 80 ppm. This prevents the HFID from continually switching ranges.

“Usage of range - 1/2/3/4” parameters Determine which ranges can be used.

“Automatic range control” parameter Enables and disables the automatic range change control.

“Absolute, range upper/lower limit” parameters These parameters are read-only.

HAS64E-IM-SW39(1) [NGA-e (HFID-Software 3.9.x)] 08/10 NGA 2000 5 - 27

Page 76: Software Version 3.9 - Emerson€¦ · Software Version 3.9.x ... 3- 6 3.8.1 Control module manufacturing data ... This also includes a self-test of the analyzer(s) or analyzer module(s)

5- 28 NGA 2000 HAS64E-IM-SW39(1) [NGA-e (HFID-Software 3.9.x)] 08/10

Changing to the “Actual switch levels” submenu: ⇒ Press the ↑ -key or the ↓ -key until the “Actual switch levels” item is displayed against a

black background. ⇒ Press the ↵ -key or the → -key to change to the submenu.

Adjusting settings ⇒ Press the ↑ -key or the ↓ -key until the appropriate menu item is displayed against a

black background. ⇒ Select the item by pressing the ↵ -key or the → -key. ⇒ Set the new value with the ↑ -key or the ↓ -key. A single digit can be selected using the

← -key or the → -key. ⇒ Confirm the new value with the ↵ -key or cancel the changes and return to the previous

value by pressing F2 (Back).

Page 77: Software Version 3.9 - Emerson€¦ · Software Version 3.9.x ... 3- 6 3.8.1 Control module manufacturing data ... This also includes a self-test of the analyzer(s) or analyzer module(s)

Analyzer and I/O, expert controls & setup: 5.1.4.5 Units

Main menu ↓

Analyzer and I/O, expert controls & setup ↓

Analyzer module setup ↓

Gas measurement parameters ↓

Units ↓

HOME ESCAPE

HFID_WO1000001

F1 F2 F3 F4 F5

6.28 ppmUnits

Gas measurement units: Pressure measurement units: Temperature measurement units: ppm to mg/Nm3 conversion factor: Lower explosion limit (LEL): Upper explosion limit (UEL): Variables are still sent as the basic SI unit

ppm

hPa

C

1.000

0.00 % 0.00 %

In this menu the various measurement units can be selected.

Menu items

“Gas/Pressure/Temperature measurement units” parameters Here the units for the display of gas concentration, pressure and temperature can be selected.

“ppm to mg/Nm3 conversion factor” parameter This value must be correctly set for the sample gas.

Options The following options are available for the first three parameters:

Gas measurement units ppb parts per billion ppm parts per million mg/Nm3 milligrams per Nm³ % per cent

Pressure measurement units hPa hectopascal psig pounds per square inch

HAS64E-IM-SW39(1) [NGA-e (HFID-Software 3.9.x)] 08/10 NGA 2000 5 - 29

Page 78: Software Version 3.9 - Emerson€¦ · Software Version 3.9.x ... 3- 6 3.8.1 Control module manufacturing data ... This also includes a self-test of the analyzer(s) or analyzer module(s)

5- 30 NGA 2000 HAS64E-IM-SW39(1) [NGA-e (HFID-Software 3.9.x)] 08/10

Temperature units C degrees Celsius F degrees Fahrenheit

Adjusting settings ⇒ Press the ↑ -key or the ↓ -key until the appropriate menu item is displayed against a

black background. ⇒ Select the item by pressing the ↵ -key or the → -key. ⇒ Set the new value with the ↑ -key or the ↓ -key. A single digit can be selected using the

← -key or the → -key. ⇒ Confirm the new value with the ↵ -key or cancel the changes and return to the previous

value by pressing F2 (Back).

Page 79: Software Version 3.9 - Emerson€¦ · Software Version 3.9.x ... 3- 6 3.8.1 Control module manufacturing data ... This also includes a self-test of the analyzer(s) or analyzer module(s)

Analyzer and I/O, expert controls & setup: 5.1.4.6 Linearization functions

Main menu ↓

Analyzer and I/O, expert controls & setup ↓

Analyzer module setup ↓

Gas measurement parameters ↓

Linearization functions ↓

HOME ESCAPE

HFID_WO1000001

F1 F2 F3 F4 F5

6.28 ppmLinearization functions

Midpoint correction set up... Use the midpoint correction for a piecewise-linear final correction, to bring up to three points precisely onto the curve.

In this menu the midpoint correction can be setup up to optimize the linearizer.

The HFID generally operates linearly over all ranges. It should therefore never be necessary to use the linearizer. This section describes the setup only very briefly.

Menu items

“Midpoint correction setup” submenu Accesses a submenu in which a piecewise linear correction can be configured.

page 5-32

See also chapter 5.1.4.1“Linearization parameters”, page 5-19.

Changing to the “Midpoint correction setup” submenu: ⇒ Press the ↵ -key or the → -key to access the submenu.

HAS64E-IM-SW39(1) [NGA-e (HFID-Software 3.9.x)] 08/10 NGA 2000 5 - 31

Page 80: Software Version 3.9 - Emerson€¦ · Software Version 3.9.x ... 3- 6 3.8.1 Control module manufacturing data ... This also includes a self-test of the analyzer(s) or analyzer module(s)

Midpoint correction The linearization polynomial can be linearized with up to three points.

5- 32 NGA 2000 HAS64E-IM-SW39(1) [NGA-e (HFID-Software 3.9.x)] 08/10

HOME ESCAPE SET NEXT

HFID_WO1000001

F1 F2 F3 F4 F5

6.28 ppmMidpoint correction set up

Range 1 Correction: Point being measured: Point 1 gas concentration: Point 2 gas concentration: Point 3 gas concentration: Point 1 reading: Point 2 reading: Point 3 reading: Span gas value: Analyzer functioning:

DISABLED

Point 3 -1.00 ppm -1.00 ppm -1.00 ppm -1.00 ppm -1.00 ppm -1.00 ppm 0.00 ppm

READY

⇒ Change to the “Midpoint correction setup” menu. ⇒ Press F4 (NEXT) to select the range (“RANGE 1/2/3/4”) for correction. ⇒ Disable the correction function in the “Correction” parameter. This is necessary to avoid

interference from previously set values. ⇒ Select the point to be measured in the “Point being measured” parameter. ⇒ Set the gas concentration for the selected point. ⇒ Supply gas of the concentration just set. When the measurement display is stable, press

F3 (“SET”). The analyzer sets the “reading” parameter to the value set in the previous step.

⇒ The previous three steps can be repeated for up to two further points. ⇒ Enable the correction function.

Page 81: Software Version 3.9 - Emerson€¦ · Software Version 3.9.x ... 3- 6 3.8.1 Control module manufacturing data ... This also includes a self-test of the analyzer(s) or analyzer module(s)

Analyzer and I/O, expert controls & setup: 5.1.5 Analyzer parameter list

Main menu ↓

Analyzer and I/O, expert controls & setup ↓

Analyzer module setup ↓

Analyzer parameter list ↓

HOME ESCAPE NEXT LAST

HFID_WO1000001

F1 F2 F3 F4 F5

6.28 ppmAnalyzer Parameter List

Analyzer tag: Flame condition: First line's parameter: Second line's parameter: Third line's parameter: Fourth line's parameter:

HFID_WO1000001

ON

Sample flow: Sample temperature:

Flame status: Raw signal:

In this menu various display, linearization, concentration and calibration parameters can be set. This is a collection of the most oft-used parameters which are more fully described in other chapters. Browse through the different screens of this menu using F3 (“NEXT” or “FIRST”) and F4 (“LAST” or “BACK”).

Menu items

“Analyzer tag” parameter The tag for the HFID can be set here. See ch. 5.1, page 5-4.

“Flame condition” parameter Indicates whether the flame is lit. This parameter is read-only.

“First/Second/Third/Fourth line’s parameter” parameters Ch. 5.1.6, page 5-35

“Linearization parameters” submenu Access the “Set linearity coefficients” submenu

Ch. 5.1.4.1, page 5-20

“Control mode” parameter Ch. 5.3, page 5-55 under “Range and functional control”

“Output delay time” parameter Ch. 5.1.4.2, page 5-23

HAS64E-IM-SW39(1) [NGA-e (HFID-Software 3.9.x)] 08/10 NGA 2000 5 - 33

Page 82: Software Version 3.9 - Emerson€¦ · Software Version 3.9.x ... 3- 6 3.8.1 Control module manufacturing data ... This also includes a self-test of the analyzer(s) or analyzer module(s)

5- 34 NGA 2000 HAS64E-IM-SW39(1) [NGA-e (HFID-Software 3.9.x)] 08/10

“Range 1/2/3/4 upper/lower limit” parameters Ch. 5.1.4.3, page 5-25

“Range 1/2/3/4 t90 time” parameters Ch. 5.1.4.2, page 5-23

“Linearizer on range 1/2/3/4” parameters Ch. 5.1.4.1, page 5-19

“Calibration averaging time”, “Calibration failure alarm”, “Cal failure allowed”, “Calibration time out” and “Calibrate ranges” parameters

Ch. 5.1.2, page 5-13

“Calibration adjustment limits”, “Zero gas - range 1/2/3/4” and “Span gas - range 1/2/3/4” parameters

Ch. 5.1.1, pages 5-5 and 5-7

Adjusting settings ⇒ If necessary, press F3 (“NEXT” or “FIRST”) or F4 (“LAST” or “BACK”) to reach the

appropriate menu page. ⇒ Press the ↑ -key or the ↓ -key until the appropriate menu item is displayed against a

black background. ⇒ Select the item by pressing the ↵ -key or the → -key. ⇒ Set the new value with the ↑ -key or the ↓ -key. A single digit can be selected using the

← -key or the → -key. ⇒ Confirm the new value with the ↵ -key or cancel the changes and return to the previous

value by pressing F2 (Back).

Changing to the “Set linearity coefficients” submenu ⇒ If necessary, press F3 (“FIRST”) or F4 (“BACK”) to reach the first menu page. ⇒ Press the ↑ -key or the ↓ -key until the “Linearization parameters” item is displayed

against a black background. ⇒ Press the ↵ -key or the → -key to change to the submenu.

Page 83: Software Version 3.9 - Emerson€¦ · Software Version 3.9.x ... 3- 6 3.8.1 Control module manufacturing data ... This also includes a self-test of the analyzer(s) or analyzer module(s)

Analyzer and I/O, expert controls & setup: 5.1.6 Displayed parameters

Main menu ↓

Analyzer and I/O, expert controls & setup ↓

Analyzer module setup ↓

Displayed parameters ↓

HOME ESCAPE

HFID_WO1000001

F1 F2 F3 F4 F5

6.28 ppmDisplayed parameters

First line's parameter: Second line's parameter: Third line's parameter: Fourth line's parameter: Displayed concentration digits: Digits after decimal point:

Sampleflow:

Sample temperature: Flame status:

Raw signal:

6 2

In this menu the single component display can be configured.

Menu items

“First/Second/Third/Fourth line's parameters” parameters Here the parameters which are displayed in the four additional lines in the single component display can be selected. The following options are available:

Sample flow Sample pressure Burner fuel pressure Burner fuel flow Burner air Air sense Burner air pressure Health Operational status Raw signal Calibration status Delay time t90 time Auto-ignition status Flame status Oven temperature Sample temperature Preamp temperature Case temperature Purge control status

HAS64E-IM-SW39(1) [NGA-e (HFID-Software 3.9.x)] 08/10 NGA 2000 5 - 35

Page 84: Software Version 3.9 - Emerson€¦ · Software Version 3.9.x ... 3- 6 3.8.1 Control module manufacturing data ... This also includes a self-test of the analyzer(s) or analyzer module(s)

5- 36 NGA 2000 HAS64E-IM-SW39(1) [NGA-e (HFID-Software 3.9.x)] 08/10

“Displayed concentration digits” and “Digits after decimal point” parameters Determine how the numerical measurement value should be displayed. The number of displayed concentration digits can be set to at least 3 and up to 6; the number of digits after the decimal point can be set to up to 3.

Adjusting settings ⇒ Press the ↑ -key or the ↓ -key until the appropriate menu item is displayed against a

black background. ⇒ Select the item by pressing the ↵ -key or the → -key. ⇒ Set the new value with the ↑ -key or the ↓ -key. A single digit can be selected using the

← -key or the → -key. ⇒ Confirm the new value with the ↵ -key or cancel the changes and return to the previous

value by pressing F2 (Back).

Page 85: Software Version 3.9 - Emerson€¦ · Software Version 3.9.x ... 3- 6 3.8.1 Control module manufacturing data ... This also includes a self-test of the analyzer(s) or analyzer module(s)

Analyzer and I/O, expert controls & setup: 5.2 System & network I/O module controls and setup

Main menu ↓

Analyzer and I/O, expert controls & setup ↓

System & network I/O module controls (or setup) ↓

Measure <<< Back... >>>

HFID_WO1000001

F1 F2 F3 F4 F5

6.28 ppm-- System & Network I/O Module Controls --

System SIO module... System DIO module...

The “System & network I/O module controls” and “...setup” menus provide access to submenus in which the SIO and DIO modules of a control module (HFID analyzer or platform) can be configured.

For the HFID, the “System & network I/O module setup” menu and all its submenus are identical with “System & network I/O module controls”.

Menu items

“System SIO module” submenu Accesses a submenu in which the SIO module can be configured.

Ch. 5.2.1, page 5-39

“System DIO module” submenu Accesses a submenu in which any installed DIO modules can be configured. If no DIO modules are installed, a short message to this effect will be displayed.

Ch. 5.2.2, page 5-51

Changing to a submenu ⇒ Press the ↑ -key or the ↓ -key until the appropriate menu item is displayed against a

black background. ⇒ Press the ↵ -key or the → -key to change to the submenu.

HAS64E-IM-SW39(1) [NGA-e (HFID-Software 3.9.x)] 08/10 NGA 2000 5 - 37

Page 86: Software Version 3.9 - Emerson€¦ · Software Version 3.9.x ... 3- 6 3.8.1 Control module manufacturing data ... This also includes a self-test of the analyzer(s) or analyzer module(s)

5- 38 NGA 2000 HAS64E-IM-SW39(1) [NGA-e (HFID-Software 3.9.x)] 08/10

Page 87: Software Version 3.9 - Emerson€¦ · Software Version 3.9.x ... 3- 6 3.8.1 Control module manufacturing data ... This also includes a self-test of the analyzer(s) or analyzer module(s)

Analyzer and I/O, expert controls & setup: 5.2.1 System SIO module

Main menu ↓

Analyzer and I/O, expert controls & setup ↓

System & network I/O module controls (or setup) ↓

System SIO-Module ↓

Measure Back...

HFID_WO1000001

F1 F2 F3 F4 F5

6.28 ppm-- System SIO Module --

Analog output setup... Serial interface setup... Relay outputs setup... Module installed:

Yes

From this menu submenus are accessible in which various settings can be configured for the SIO module.

Menu items

“Analog output setup” submenu Accesses a submenu in which the analog outputs of the SIO module can be configured.

Ch. 5.2.1.1, page 5-41

“Serial interface setup” submenu In this submenu the parameters for data transfer with an external unit can be set.

Ch. 5.2.1.2, page 5-47

“Relay outputs setup” submenu In this submenu the relay outputs can be configured.

Ch. 5.2.1.3, page 5-49

“Module installed” parameter Indicates whether an SIO module is installed on the platform or analyzer.

Basic configuration of an SIO card At least 2 and no more than 8 analog outputs A serial interface (RS 232 or RS 485) to connect the analyzer with an external

computer 3 relay outputs Please consult the SIO documentation for the entire specification

HAS64E-IM-SW39(1) [NGA-e (HFID-Software 3.9.x)] 08/10 NGA 2000 5 - 39

Page 88: Software Version 3.9 - Emerson€¦ · Software Version 3.9.x ... 3- 6 3.8.1 Control module manufacturing data ... This also includes a self-test of the analyzer(s) or analyzer module(s)

5- 40 NGA 2000 HAS64E-IM-SW39(1) [NGA-e (HFID-Software 3.9.x)] 08/10

Changing to a submenu ⇒ Press the ↑ -key or the ↓ -key until the appropriate menu item is displayed against a

black background. ⇒ Press the ↵ -key or the → -key to change to the submenu.

Page 89: Software Version 3.9 - Emerson€¦ · Software Version 3.9.x ... 3- 6 3.8.1 Control module manufacturing data ... This also includes a self-test of the analyzer(s) or analyzer module(s)

Analyzer and I/O, expert controls & setup: 5.2.1.1 Analog output setup

Main menu ↓

Analyzer and I/O, expert controls & setup ↓

System & network I/O module controls (or setup) ↓

System SIO module ↓

Analog output setup ↓

Measure Back... More...

HFID_WO1000001

F1 F2 F3 F4 F5

6.28 ppm-- Analog Output Setup --

Output number: Choose signal source module... Choose signal... Signal value for 0% output: Signal value for 100% output: Output current: Hold output during calibration: Signal name: Current signal value: Source module:

1

0.00 10

0...20mA No

Primary Variable -1.00

HFID_WO1000001

In this menu the analog outputs of the SIO module can be configured. There are between two and eight outputs available.

Procedure: Overview ⇒ Select the output to be configured in the “Output number” line. ⇒ Select the module from which the signal originates in the “Choose signal source module”

line. ⇒ Select the signal to be transmitted in the “Choose signal” line. ⇒ Set the signal values for the output signal in the “Signal value for 0%/100% output” lines. ⇒ Set the output current range in the “Output current” line. ⇒ Determine whether the signal should remain stable at the last measured value while

calibration is in progress in the “Hold output during calibration” line. ⇒ Press F5 (“More”) to change to the next menu page. Set the signal to be sent should the

analyzer malfunction and make any fine adjustment necessary.

HAS64E-IM-SW39(1) [NGA-e (HFID-Software 3.9.x)] 08/10 NGA 2000 5 - 41

Page 90: Software Version 3.9 - Emerson€¦ · Software Version 3.9.x ... 3- 6 3.8.1 Control module manufacturing data ... This also includes a self-test of the analyzer(s) or analyzer module(s)

Menu items

“Output number” parameter Select here the output to be configured.

“Choose signal source module” submenu Accesses a submenu which displays a list of all the modules connected to the platform or analyzer. Select a module with the ↑ -key or the ↓ -key and confirm the selection with the ↵ -key or the → -key. If more than eight modules are connected, browse through the list using F3 (“<<<”) and F5 (“>>>”). Once the selection has been confirmed, the display returns to the “Analog output setup” menu and the tag of the selected channel appears in the “Source module” parameter.

“Choose signal” submenu Changes to a submenu which displays a list of all the signals that can be sent by the module selected in the “Choose signal source module” line. Select a signal with the ↑ -key or the ↓ -key and confirm the selection with the ↵ -key or the → -key. If more than eight signals are available, browse through the list using F3 (“<<<”) and F5 (“>>>”). The following signals are available when the HFID module is selected as a signal source:

Burner air pressure Air sense Burner air Burner fuel flow Burner fuel pressure Sample pressure Sample flow Purge control status Case temperature Preamp temperature Flame status Autoignition t90 time Delay time Calibration Raw signal Operation Health Validity Primary variable

Once the selection has been confirmed, the display returns to the “Analog Output Setup” menu and the name of the selected signal appears in the “Signal name” parameter.

5- 42 NGA 2000 HAS64E-IM-SW39(1) [NGA-e (HFID-Software 3.9.x)] 08/10

Page 91: Software Version 3.9 - Emerson€¦ · Software Version 3.9.x ... 3- 6 3.8.1 Control module manufacturing data ... This also includes a self-test of the analyzer(s) or analyzer module(s)

Analyzer and I/O, expert controls & setup: 5.2.1.1 Analog output setup

“Signal value for 0%/100% output” parameters The signal values for the output signals are set here. This makes it possible to “magnify” a specific part of the measurement range. For example:

Measurement range is from 0 to 100 ppm The signal for 0% is set to 40 ppm, that for 100% to 70 ppm Standard analog output setting: 0V = 0 ppm 10V = 100 ppm Adjusted analog output setting: 0V = 40 ppm 10V = 70 ppm

Following a range change the values set here will be lost. To change the output signal permanently, the settings in the “Range setting” menu must be changed. See ch. 5.1.4.3, page 5-25.

The signal range at the analog output should never be smaller than that of the smallest measurement range. This is to avoid excessive noise on the output signal.

“Output current” parameter The output current range is set in this line. There are two options available:

0...20 mA (and automatically 0...10V) 4...20 mA (i.e. 2...10V)

“Hold output during calibration” parameter Determines the behavior of the signal at the analog output during calibration. The two options are:

Yes the signal remains steady during calibration No the signal follows the measurement signal during calibration

See the following illustration:

This setting is valid for all types of calibration for a platform or analyzer SIO: manual, time controlled, AK controlled and system calibration.

HAS64E-IM-SW39(1) [NGA-e (HFID-Software 3.9.x)] 08/10 NGA 2000 5 - 43

Page 92: Software Version 3.9 - Emerson€¦ · Software Version 3.9.x ... 3- 6 3.8.1 Control module manufacturing data ... This also includes a self-test of the analyzer(s) or analyzer module(s)

“Signal name”, “Current signal value” and “Source module” parameters These parameters are read-only and show the current settings: the selected signal, the current value of the selected signal and the module from which the signal originates.

Next page Pressing F5 (“More”) accesses the next page which contains further configurable parameters:

Measure Back... More...

HFID_WO1000001

F1 F2 F3 F4 F5

6.28 ppm-- Output Signal if Assigned Module Fails --

Output(s) value on analyzer failure:

-- Fine Adjustment -- Output number: Operation mode: Fine adjustment for 0% output: Fine adjustment for 100% output:

BeginOfRange-10%

1 Normal

4096 819

“Output(s) value on analyzer failure” parameter Determines which signal should be transmitted in the event of the analyzer failing. The following options are available:

BeginOfRange-10% EndOfRange+10% Actual BeginOfRange EndOfRange

“Output number” parameter Indicates the currently selected output number. If necessary, the selection can be changed here.

“Operation mode” parameter The following options are available for this parameter:

Normal: the absolute measurement signal is sent to the analog output Adjust 0V: Adjustment between display and analog output for 0V with fine adjustment

0%. Adjust 10V: Adjustment between display and analog output for 10V with fine

adjustment 100%.

5- 44 NGA 2000 HAS64E-IM-SW39(1) [NGA-e (HFID-Software 3.9.x)] 08/10

Page 93: Software Version 3.9 - Emerson€¦ · Software Version 3.9.x ... 3- 6 3.8.1 Control module manufacturing data ... This also includes a self-test of the analyzer(s) or analyzer module(s)

Analyzer and I/O, expert controls & setup: 5.2.1.1 Analog output setup

“Fine adjustment for 0%/100% output” parameters The values of these parameters may be set within the following limits:

For 0%: 3500 – 4800 For 100%: 750 – 900

These values can only be changed when the special scaling for the selected output is disabled. Press F5 (“More”) to change to the next page, select the output and, if necessary, set the special scaling to “No”.

Measure Back... More...

HFID_WO1000001

F1 F2 F3 F4 F5

6.28 ppm-- Output Signal if Assigned Module Fails --

Output(s) value on analyzer failure:

-- Fine Adjustment -- Output number: Operation mode: Fine adjustment for 0% output: Fine adjustment for 100% output:

BeginOfRange-10%

1 Normal

4096 819

Measure Back... More...

HFID_WO1000001

F1 F2 F3 F4 F5

6.28 ppm-- Special Scaling for Concentration Signal--

(Scaling is the same as range limits) Output #1: No Output #2: No Output #3: No Output #4: No Output #5: No Output #6: Yes Output #7: Yes Output #8: Yes

Adjusting settings ⇒ Press the ↑ -key or the ↓ -key until the appropriate menu item is displayed against a

black background. ⇒ Select the item by pressing the ↵ -key or the → -key. ⇒ Set the new value with the ↑ -key or the ↓ -key. A single digit can be selected using the

← -key or the → -key.

HAS64E-IM-SW39(1) [NGA-e (HFID-Software 3.9.x)] 08/10 NGA 2000 5 - 45

Page 94: Software Version 3.9 - Emerson€¦ · Software Version 3.9.x ... 3- 6 3.8.1 Control module manufacturing data ... This also includes a self-test of the analyzer(s) or analyzer module(s)

5- 46 NGA 2000 HAS64E-IM-SW39(1) [NGA-e (HFID-Software 3.9.x)] 08/10

⇒ Confirm the new value with the ↵ -key or cancel the changes and return to the previous value by pressing F2 (Back).

Changing to a submenu ⇒ Press the ↑ -key or the ↓ -key until the appropriate menu item is displayed against a

black background. ⇒ Press the ↵ -key or the → -key to change to the submenu.

Page 95: Software Version 3.9 - Emerson€¦ · Software Version 3.9.x ... 3- 6 3.8.1 Control module manufacturing data ... This also includes a self-test of the analyzer(s) or analyzer module(s)

Analyzer and I/O, expert controls & setup: 5.2.1.2 Serial interface setup

Main menu ↓

Analyzer and I/O, expert controls & setup ↓

System & network I/O module controls (or setup) ↓

System SIO module ↓

Serial interface setup ↓

Measure Back...

HFID_WO1000001

F1 F2 F3 F4 F5

6.28 ppm-- Serial Interface Setup --

Baud rate: Data bits: Stop bits: Parity: Echo mode: Handshake: Transmission delay: Type of installed serial interface: Communication protocol: Special protocol definitions...

19200

8 1

None Disabled Xon/Xoff

0 RS232

AK

In this menu the parameters for the data transfer between the analyzer or platform and an external unit can be configured. These settings depend on the configuration of the analyzer or platform and that of the external unit. The configuration of the serial interface is described in a separate manual.

Options

“Baud rate” parameter 300 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200

“Data bits” parameter 7 8

“Stop bits” parameter 1 2

HAS64E-IM-SW39(1) [NGA-e (HFID-Software 3.9.x)] 08/10 NGA 2000 5 - 47

Page 96: Software Version 3.9 - Emerson€¦ · Software Version 3.9.x ... 3- 6 3.8.1 Control module manufacturing data ... This also includes a self-test of the analyzer(s) or analyzer module(s)

5- 48 NGA 2000 HAS64E-IM-SW39(1) [NGA-e (HFID-Software 3.9.x)] 08/10

“Parity” parameter None Even Odd

“Echo mode” parameter Enabled Disabled

“Handshake” parameter None Xon/Xoff

“Transmission delay” parameter 0… 100

“Type of installed serial interface” parameter RS232 RS485/ 2w RS485/ 4w RS485/ 4w- Bus None

“Communication protocol” parameter None AK

The “Special protocol definitions” line accesses the “AK-Protocol Definitions” submenu in which the address for the RS-485 interface can be set.

Adjusting settings ⇒ Press the ↑ -key or the ↓ -key until the appropriate menu item is displayed against a

black background. ⇒ Select the item by pressing the ↵ -key or the → -key. ⇒ Set the new value with the ↑ -key or the ↓ -key. A single digit can be selected using the

← -key or the → -key. ⇒ Confirm the new value with the ↵ -key or cancel the changes and return to the previous

value by pressing F2 (Back).

Changing to the “AK-Protocol Definitions” submenu ⇒ Press the ↑ -key or the ↓ -key until the “Special protocol definitions” item is displayed

against a black background. ⇒ Press the ↵ -key or the → -key to change to the submenu.

Page 97: Software Version 3.9 - Emerson€¦ · Software Version 3.9.x ... 3- 6 3.8.1 Control module manufacturing data ... This also includes a self-test of the analyzer(s) or analyzer module(s)

Analyzer and I/O, expert controls & setup: 5.2.1.3 Relay outputs setup

Main menu ↓

Analyzer and I/O, expert controls & setup ↓

System & network I/O module controls (or setup) ↓

System SIO module ↓

Relay outputs setup ↓

Measure Back...

HFID_WO1000001

F1 F2 F3 F4 F5

6.28 ppm-- Relay Outputs Setup --

Output number: Invert signal: Choose source module... Choose signal... _____________________________________________ Signal comes from: Signal name: Actual status:

1

Disabled

HFID_WO1000001 PLC-Result 1

Off

An SIO card has three relays. A jumper on the main board is used to determine whether the relay operates as normally open (NO) or normally closed (NC). Information on the entire specification of an SIO card is available in separate documentation. Each of the three relay outputs must be configured in this menu.

Procedure: Overview ⇒ Select the output to be configured in the “Output number” line. ⇒ Enable or disable signal inversion in the “Invert signal” line. ⇒ Select the module from which the signal originates in the “Choose source module”

submenu. ⇒ Select the signal to be transmitted in the “Choose signal” submenu.

Menu items

“Output number” parameter Select here the number of the relay to be configured. There are three relay outputs available.

“Invert signal” parameter If this parameter is set to “Enabled”, the signal is inverted at the selected output. This may be necessary for example when a signal failure is to trigger an alarm.

HAS64E-IM-SW39(1) [NGA-e (HFID-Software 3.9.x)] 08/10 NGA 2000 5 - 49

Page 98: Software Version 3.9 - Emerson€¦ · Software Version 3.9.x ... 3- 6 3.8.1 Control module manufacturing data ... This also includes a self-test of the analyzer(s) or analyzer module(s)

5- 50 NGA 2000 HAS64E-IM-SW39(1) [NGA-e (HFID-Software 3.9.x)] 08/10

“Choose source module” and “Choose signal” submenus First a source module and then a signal can be selected here. Once the selection has been confirmed, the display returns to the “Relay outputs setup” menu and the selections appear in the “Signal comes from” and “Signal name” lines.

Ch. 5.2.1.1, page 5-42

“Signal comes from” and “Signal name” parameters Indicate which module and signal are currently selected for this output.

“Actual status” parameter Shows the current status of the selected relay.

Adjusting settings ⇒ Press the ↑ -key or the ↓ -key until the appropriate menu item is displayed against a

black background. ⇒ Select the item by pressing the ↵ -key or the → -key. ⇒ Set the new value with the ↑ -key or the ↓ -key. A single digit can be selected using the

← -key or the → -key. ⇒ Confirm the new value with the ↵ -key or cancel the changes and return to the previous

value by pressing F2 (Back).

Changing to a submenu ⇒ Press the ↑ -key or the ↓ -key until the appropriate menu item is displayed against a

black background. ⇒ Press the ↵ -key or the → -key to change to the submenu.

Page 99: Software Version 3.9 - Emerson€¦ · Software Version 3.9.x ... 3- 6 3.8.1 Control module manufacturing data ... This also includes a self-test of the analyzer(s) or analyzer module(s)

Analyzer and I/O, expert controls & setup: 5.2.2 System DIO module

Main menu ↓

Analyzer and I/O, expert controls & setup ↓

System and network I/O module controls (or setup) ↓

System DIO module ↓

Measure Next... Back... Ackn!

HFID_WO1000001

F1 F2 F3 F4 F5

6.28 ppm-- System DIO Module --

Inputs... Output number: Choose source module... Choose signal... Invert output: Module state: Slot ID: Signal name: Signal level: Signal comes from:

1

Disabled Normal

1 Failure

Off HFD

Each system DIO module consists of eight digital inputs and 24 digital outputs. In the “System DIO Module” menu, the outputs of the external system DIO modules can be configured. The “Inputs” menu is also accessible, in which the inputs can be configured. If several system DIO modules are connected to the platform, pressing F3 will access the next module. The current DIO slot’s ID appears in the “Slot ID” line. More information about the complete specification of a DIO card is given in its own manual.

Configuring the outputs

Procedure: Overview ⇒ Select the output to be configured in the “Output number” line. ⇒ Select the signal to be transmitted in the “Choose source module” and “Choose signal”

submenu. ⇒ Determine whether the measurement signal should be inverted in the “Invert output” line.

Menu items and function keys

“Inputs” submenu Accesses the “Inputs” submenu in order to configure the digital inputs.

Page 5-53.

HAS64E-IM-SW39(1) [NGA-e (HFID-Software 3.9.x)] 08/10 NGA 2000 5 - 51

Page 100: Software Version 3.9 - Emerson€¦ · Software Version 3.9.x ... 3- 6 3.8.1 Control module manufacturing data ... This also includes a self-test of the analyzer(s) or analyzer module(s)

“Output number” parameter The output to be configured is selected in this line. There are a total of 24 outputs available.

“Choose source module” and “Choose signal” submenus Using these submenus, first a module is selected and then a signal. After confirming the selection, the display returns to the “System DIO Module” screen and the selections displayed in the “Signal name” and “Signal comes from” parameters.

Ch. 5.2.1.1, page 5-42

“Invert output” parameter When this option is enabled, the measurement signal at the selected output is inverted. This may be necessary when, for example, the absence of a signal should trigger an alarm.

“Module state” parameter Displays the status of the selected DIO card.

“Slot ID” parameter Displays the ID of the selected DIO card. The DIO card is selected with the F3 key (“Next”).

“Signal name” and “Signal comes from” parameters Indicate which signal is configured for this output.

“Signal level” parameter Displays the status of the currently selected signal.

“Next” function key (F3) Selects the next DIO card, when more than one card is connected.

“Ackn!” function key (F5) Confirms the elimination of an error and re-activates the output module. The 24 digital outputs of a DIO module consist of three units each with eight outputs. In the event of a short-circuit or overload, the affected unit is de-activated and secured against further damage. Once the problem has been resolved the module is once more available. It is only necessary to press F5 to confirm.

5- 52 NGA 2000 HAS64E-IM-SW39(1) [NGA-e (HFID-Software 3.9.x)] 08/10

Page 101: Software Version 3.9 - Emerson€¦ · Software Version 3.9.x ... 3- 6 3.8.1 Control module manufacturing data ... This also includes a self-test of the analyzer(s) or analyzer module(s)

Analyzer and I/O, expert controls & setup: 5.2.2 System DIO module

Configuring inputs The “Inputs” line accesses the following submenu:

Measure Next Back...

HFID_WO1000001

F1 F2 F3 F4 F5

6.28 ppm-- Inputs --

Input number: Choose module... Choose function... _____________________________________________ Slot ID: Function name: Signal level: Signal goes to:

1

1 ---- Off ----

Procedure: Overview ⇒ Select the input to be configured in the “Input number” line. ⇒ In the “Choose module” submenu, select the module to which the signal is to be sent. ⇒ In the “Choose function” submenu, select the required function.

Menu items and function keys

“Input number” parameter Here the input to be configured is selected. There is a total of eight inputs available.

“Choose module” submenu In this submenu the module to which the signal is to be sent is selected in a similar fashion to the selection of a source module. After confirmation the display automatically returns to the “Inputs” menu. The selection is displayed in the “Signal goes to” parameter.

Ch. 5.2.1.1, page 5-42 (“Choose signal source module”)

“Choose function” submenu Accesses a submenu for the selection of the required function. A list of all available functions is displayed, and can be browsed through using the F3 (“<<<”) and F5 (“>>>”) keys. Once the selection is confirmed, the display automatically returns to the “Input” menu. The selection appears in the “Function name” parameter.

“Slot ID” and “Signal level” parameters Page 5-52

“Function name” and “Signal goes to” parameters Display the selected function and target module for this input.

“Next” function key (F3) Page 5-52

HAS64E-IM-SW39(1) [NGA-e (HFID-Software 3.9.x)] 08/10 NGA 2000 5 - 53

Page 102: Software Version 3.9 - Emerson€¦ · Software Version 3.9.x ... 3- 6 3.8.1 Control module manufacturing data ... This also includes a self-test of the analyzer(s) or analyzer module(s)

5- 54 NGA 2000 HAS64E-IM-SW39(1) [NGA-e (HFID-Software 3.9.x)] 08/10

Adjusting settings ⇒ Press the ↑ -key or the ↓ -key until the appropriate menu item is displayed against a

black background. ⇒ Select the item by pressing the ↵ -key or the → -key. ⇒ Set the new value with the ↑ -key or the ↓ -key. ⇒ Confirm the new value with the ↵ -key or cancel the changes and return to the previous

value by pressing F2 (Back).

Changing to a submenu ⇒ Press the ↑ -key or the ↓ -key until the appropriate menu item is displayed against a

black background. ⇒ Press the ↵ -key or the → -key to change to the submenu.

Page 103: Software Version 3.9 - Emerson€¦ · Software Version 3.9.x ... 3- 6 3.8.1 Control module manufacturing data ... This also includes a self-test of the analyzer(s) or analyzer module(s)

HAS64E-IM-SW39(1) [NGA-e (HFID-Software 3.9.x)] 08/10 NGA 2000 5 - 55

Main Menu — Analyzer and I/O expert control & setup ↓

System & network I/O module controls (or ... I/O module setup)

If the analyzer / analyzer module is equipped with one or more network options, you will find them listed in the menu "System & Network I/O Module Controls" or "System & Network I/O Module Setup". Depending on the analyzer any of the following types of network I/O modules may be available:

1) Analog Output with 3 Alarms I/O Module 2) Auto Calibration I/O Module 3) System Auto Calibration I/O Module 4) WNOx Analyzer Module (see separate instruction and software manual) Notes: ♦ If one of these network modules is available you will find its corresponding tag listed in

this menu. If more than eight such modules are available you may open additional menu pages pressing the F5 -key.

♦ Press the ↵ -key or the → -key in the line where the tag of the module is displayed to open the setup submenu of the corresponding I/O board.

♦ For further Information please contact your customer service or refer to the manual of the corresponding I/O board!

♦ For further Information about WCLD and WNOx please contact your customer service or refer to the manual of the corresponding Analyzer Module!

Measure <<< Back... >>>

TAG

F1 F2 F3 F4 F5

95.00 ppm --System & network I/O Module Setup --

Analog I/O 3

Analyzer and I/O, expert controls & setup: 5.2.3E/A Module

Page 104: Software Version 3.9 - Emerson€¦ · Software Version 3.9.x ... 3- 6 3.8.1 Control module manufacturing data ... This also includes a self-test of the analyzer(s) or analyzer module(s)

5 - 56 NGA 2000 HAS64E-IM-SW39(1) [NGA-e (HFID-Software 3.9.x)] 08/10

Page 105: Software Version 3.9 - Emerson€¦ · Software Version 3.9.x ... 3- 6 3.8.1 Control module manufacturing data ... This also includes a self-test of the analyzer(s) or analyzer module(s)

Analyzer and I/O, expert controls & setup: 5.3 Analyzer module controls

HAS64E-IM-SW39(1) [NGA-e (HFID-Software 3.9.x)] 08/10 NGA 2000 5 - 57

Main menu ↓

Analyzer and I/O, expert controls & setup ↓

Analyzer module controls ↓

HOME ESCAPE CAL CAL DATA

HFID_WO1000001

F1 F2 F3 F4 F5

6.28 ppmAnalyzer module controls

Measurement range number: Range upper limit: Range settings... Linearizer: Range and functional control: Ranges with valid calibration: Zero/Span… Physical Measurements... Flame condition: Light Flame...

1

10.0 ppm

DISABLED Local

1&2&3&4

ON

In this menu various measurement parameters of the analyzer such as the selection of a measurement range can be set. In addition submenus are available, for example menus for zero and span calibration.

Menu items and function keys

“Measurement range number” parameter Allows the selection of a different measurement range.

“Range upper limit” parameter Indicates the upper limit of the selected range.

“Range settings” submenu Changes to the “Range setting” submenu in which lower and upper limits for all four ranges can be set.

Ch. 5.1.4.3, page 5-21

“Linearizer” parameter Indicates whether the linearizer is active for the current measurement range. Parameters for the linearizer can be set in the “Linearization parameters” and “Linearization functions” menus.

Ch. 5.1.4.1, page 5-19 “Linearization parameters” Ch. 5.1.4.6, page 5-31 “Linearization functions”

“Range and functional control” parameter Determines how the platform operates. Available options are:

Local: the platform is operated via the display Program I/O module: the measurement range is automatically selected. This function

is only available with an I/O card with three alarms (PIN 70 656 193), as the parameter

Page 106: Software Version 3.9 - Emerson€¦ · Software Version 3.9.x ... 3- 6 3.8.1 Control module manufacturing data ... This also includes a self-test of the analyzer(s) or analyzer module(s)

5- 58 NGA 2000 HAS64E-IM-SW39(1) [NGA-e (HFID-Software 3.9.x)] 08/10

settings for the automatic range change are found on the I/O card (see separate documentation).

Inputs I/O module: the measurement ranges are controlled via digital inputs, e.g. via a DIO card or an I/O card with 3 alarms.

“Zero/Span calibration” submenu and “CAL” function key (F3) Changes to the “Zero/Span Calibration” submenu in which the analyzer can be calibrated.

Ch. 5.1.1, page 5-7

“Ranges with valid calibration” parameter Indicates which (if any) ranges have been successfully calibrated.

“Physical measurements” submenu Changes to the “Physical measurements” menu which displays information on certain pressure and temperature values.

Ch. 5.3.1, page 5-59

“Flame condition” parameter Indicates the current status of the flame.

“Light Flame” submenu Changes to a submenu in which the flame can be ignited.

Ch. 4.1.5, page 4-17 (see also ch. 6.1.2.6, page 6-19)

“CAL DATA” function key (F4) Changes to the “Zero/span diagnostic data” submenu in which the results of the last calibration attempt are displayed. For further information see “Zero/span calibration”

chapter 5.1.1., page 5-8.

Adjusting settings ⇒ Press the ↑ -key or the ↓ -key until the appropriate menu item is displayed against a

black background. ⇒ Select the item by pressing the ↵ -key or the → -key. ⇒ Set the new value with the ↑ -key or the ↓ -key. A single digit can be selected using the

← -key or the → -key. ⇒ Confirm the new value with the ↵ -key or cancel the changes and return to the previous

value by pressing F2 (Back).

Changing to a submenu ⇒ Press the ↑ -key or the ↓ -key until the appropriate menu item is displayed against a

black background. ⇒ Press the ↵ -key or the → -key to change to the submenu.

Page 107: Software Version 3.9 - Emerson€¦ · Software Version 3.9.x ... 3- 6 3.8.1 Control module manufacturing data ... This also includes a self-test of the analyzer(s) or analyzer module(s)

Analyzer and I/O, expert controls & setup: 5.3.1 Physical measurements

HAS64E-IM-SW39(1) [NGA-e (HFID-Software 3.9.x)] 08/10 NGA 2000 5 - 59

Main menu ↓

Analyzer and I/O, expert controls & setup ↓

Analyzer module controls ↓

Physical measurements ↓

HOME ESCAPE

HFID_WO1000001

F1 F2 F3 F4 F5

6.28 ppmPhysical Measurements

Bypass sample flow: Flow lower limit: Flow upper limit: Sample pressure: Fuel supply pressure: Burner air pressure: Purge gas pressure: Case temperature: Sample temperature: Oven control:

4257 ml/min 4000 ml/min 5000 ml/min

228 hPa 1651 hPa 1041 hPa 691 hPa

54.0 C 191 C

ON

This menu displays some pressure and temperature measurements. Flow limits for the bypass can also be set.

Menu items

“Bypass sample flow”, “Sample pressure”, “Fuel supply pressure”, “Burner air pressure”, “Purge gas pressure” and “Case temperature” parameters

These parameters are read-only and display current measurement values.

“Flow lower limit” parameter Determines the lower limit for the bypass sample flow. Any value between -200 and +2000 ml/min can be set.

If no bypass is installed, the flow lower limit should be set to 0 or a negative value. A positive value will generate an alarm.

“Flow upper limit” parameter Determines the upper limit for the bypass sample flow. Any value between 0 and 2000 ml/min can be set.

Page 108: Software Version 3.9 - Emerson€¦ · Software Version 3.9.x ... 3- 6 3.8.1 Control module manufacturing data ... This also includes a self-test of the analyzer(s) or analyzer module(s)

5- 60 NGA 2000 HAS64E-IM-SW39(1) [NGA-e (HFID-Software 3.9.x)] 08/10

Adjusting settings ⇒ Press the ↑ -key or the ↓ -key until the appropriate menu item is displayed against a

black background. ⇒ Select the item by pressing the ↵ -key or the → -key. ⇒ Set the new value with the ↑ -key or the ↓ -key. A single digit can be selected using the

← -key or the → -key. The sign (+ or -) can be changed by pressing F4 (“+/-”). ⇒ Confirm the new value with the ↵ -key or cancel the changes and return to the previous

value by pressing F2 (Back).

Page 109: Software Version 3.9 - Emerson€¦ · Software Version 3.9.x ... 3- 6 3.8.1 Control module manufacturing data ... This also includes a self-test of the analyzer(s) or analyzer module(s)

System configuration and diagnostics: 6 Introduction

Main menu ↓

System configuration and diagnostics ↓

Measure Reset... Back...

HFID_WO1000001

F1 F2 F3 F4 F5

6.28 ppm-- System Configuration and Diagnostics --

System calibration... Diagnostic menus... Load/Save configuration (CM/MCA)... Date and time... Security codes... Network module management... System PLC... System calculator... Measurement display setup... Miscellaneous...

Pressing the ↵ -key or the → -key in the “System configuration and diagnostics” line in the main menu accesses this menu. In this area, the platform, analyzer or analyzer module can be configured. Other submenus enable the software and hardware configuration to be checked and/or adjusted. Some system configurations can also be adjusted in the expert controls (see ch. 5).

Menu items

“System calibration”, “System PLC” and “System calculator” submenus supplement

“Diagnostic menus” submenu Control module software error messages and various parameters of the HFID analyzer module.

ch. 6.1., page 6-3

“Load/Save configuration (CM/MCA)” submenu Load/save configuration data from/to the serial interface

ch. 6.2, page 6-27

“Date and time” submenu Set the system clock

ch. 6.3, page 6-29

“Security codes” submenu Configure security codes

ch. 6.4, page 6-31

HAS64E-IM-SW39(1) [NGA-e (HFID-Software 3.9.x)] 08/10 NGA 2000 6 - 1

Page 110: Software Version 3.9 - Emerson€¦ · Software Version 3.9.x ... 3- 6 3.8.1 Control module manufacturing data ... This also includes a self-test of the analyzer(s) or analyzer module(s)

“Network module management” submenu Install, remove and swap I/O modules

ch. 6.5, page 6-33

“Measurement display setup” submenu Options for the measurement display

ch. 6.6, page 6-37

“Miscellaneous” submenu System tags and controlling the pumps

ch. 6.7, page 6-39

“Reset” function key (F2) Reboot system

ch. 6.8, page 6-41

Structure of chapter 6: All menus which must be navigated through to reach a specific submenu are listed vertically. At the end of the “breadcrumb” list, the menu is illustrated, following which explanations and instructions, which may themselves contain illustrations, are to be found.

Example: Software error messages are to be reviewed. Main menu

↓ System configuration and diagnostics

↓ Diagnostic menus

↓ Control module diagnostics

Measure Back... Reset...

HFID_WO1000001

F1 F2 F3 F4 F5

6.28 ppm-- Control Module Diagnostics --

Software error code (1 = no error): Last software error message: And: And: And: And:

1

No_Error No_Error No_Error No_Error No_Error

And: And: And: Edit to reset:

No_Error No_Error No_Error

Report

Further instructions follow.

6- 2 3.9.x)] 08/10

NGA 2000 HAS64E-IM-SW39(1) [NGA-e (HFID-Software

Page 111: Software Version 3.9 - Emerson€¦ · Software Version 3.9.x ... 3- 6 3.8.1 Control module manufacturing data ... This also includes a self-test of the analyzer(s) or analyzer module(s)

System configuration and diagnostics: 6.1 Diagnostic menus

Main menu ↓

System configuration and diagnostics ↓

Diagnostic menus ↓

Measure <<< Back... >>>

HFID_WO1000001

F1 F2 F3 F4 F5

6.28 ppm-- Diagnostic Menus --

Control module diagnostics... Analyzer module diagnostics...

From this menu further submenus can be accessed in which software error messages from the control module or analyzer module can be checked and corrected. If other modules are connected to the system, they will also be listed here. If more than eight modules are available, use F3 (“<<<”) and F4 (“>>>”) to browse through the list.

Menu items

“Control module diagnostics” submenu Display software errors from the control module.

ch. 6.1.1, page 6-5

“Analyzer module diagnostics” submenu Display and correct various parameters and software errors of the analyzer module.

ch. 6.1.2, page 6-7

Changing to a submenu ⇒ Press the ↑ -key or the ↓ -key until the appropriate menu item is displayed against a

black background. ⇒ Press the ↵ -key or the → -key to change to the submenu.

HAS64E-IM-SW39(1) [NGA-e (HFID-Software 3.9.x)] 08/10 NGA 2000 6 - 3

Page 112: Software Version 3.9 - Emerson€¦ · Software Version 3.9.x ... 3- 6 3.8.1 Control module manufacturing data ... This also includes a self-test of the analyzer(s) or analyzer module(s)

6- 4 NGA 2000 HAS64E-IM-SW39(1) [NGA-e (HFID-Software 3.9.x)] 08/10

Page 113: Software Version 3.9 - Emerson€¦ · Software Version 3.9.x ... 3- 6 3.8.1 Control module manufacturing data ... This also includes a self-test of the analyzer(s) or analyzer module(s)

System configuration and diagnostics: 6.1.1 Control module diagnostics

Main menu ↓

System configuration and diagnostics ↓

Diagnostic menus ↓

Control module diagnostics ↓

Measure Back... Reset...

HFID_WO1000001

F1 F2 F3 F4 F5

6.28 ppm-- Control Module Diagnostics --

Software error code (1 = no error): Last software error message: And: And: And: And: And: And: And: Edit to reset:

1

No_Error No_Error No_Error No_Error No_Error No_Error No_Error No_Error

Report

This menu lists software error messages from the control module.

Procedure when errors are reported ⇒ Note error(s). ⇒ Set the “Edit to reset” parameter to “Reset”.

If the errors remain: ⇒ Press F5 (“Reset”) to change to the “System reset” menu. Reset the system by pressing

the ↵ -key or the → -key. ⇒ Following the system reset return to the “Control module diagnostics” menu. ⇒ Check for error messages. ⇒ If error messages are still listed, please contact our customer services.

If errors are no longer being reported in this list, reset the “Edit to reset” parameter to “Report”.

Setting the “Edit to reset” parameter ⇒ Select the item by pressing the ↵ -key or the → -key. ⇒ Set the new value with the ↑ -key or the ↓ -key. ⇒ Confirm the new value with the ↵ -key.

HAS64E-IM-SW39(1) [NGA-e (HFID-Software 3.9.x)] 08/10 NGA 2000 6 - 5

Page 114: Software Version 3.9 - Emerson€¦ · Software Version 3.9.x ... 3- 6 3.8.1 Control module manufacturing data ... This also includes a self-test of the analyzer(s) or analyzer module(s)

6- 6 NGA 2000 HAS64E-IM-SW39(1) [NGA-e (HFID-Software 3.9.x)] 08/10

Page 115: Software Version 3.9 - Emerson€¦ · Software Version 3.9.x ... 3- 6 3.8.1 Control module manufacturing data ... This also includes a self-test of the analyzer(s) or analyzer module(s)

System configuration and diagnostics: 6.1.2 Analyzer module diagnostics

Main menu ↓

System configurations and diagnostics ↓

Diagnostic menus ↓

Analyzer module diagnostics ↓

HOME ESCAPE

HFID_WO1000001

F1 F2 F3 F4 F5

6.28 ppmAnalyzer Diagnostics

Power supply voltages... Primary variable parameters... Physical measurement parameters... Temperature control parameters... Miscellaneous control parameters... Auto ignition parameters... Analyzer self test... Software diagnostics... Start up analyzer...

From this menu various submenus can be accessed in which measurement and calibration parameters of the HFID analyzer module can be checked and set.

Menu items

“Power supply voltages” submenu Displays the current and manufacturer’s values for the supply voltages.

ch. 6.1.2.1, page 6-9

“Primary variable parameters” submenu Displays various concentration parameters.

ch. 6.1.2.2, page 6-11

“Physical measurement parameters” submenu Displays current and manufacturer’s values for pressure, flow and temperature and enables the setting of limits.

ch. 6.1.2.3, page 6-13

“Temperature control parameters” submenu Displays certain parameters which are relevant for temperature control.

ch. 6.1.2.4, page 6-15

“Miscellaneous control parameters” submenu Displays certain other parameters. Also, the fuel type can be set as well as the operational sample pressure for manual ignition.

ch. 6.1.2.5, page 6-17

HAS64E-IM-SW39(1) [NGA-e (HFID-Software 3.9.x)] 08/10 NGA 2000 6 - 7

Page 116: Software Version 3.9 - Emerson€¦ · Software Version 3.9.x ... 3- 6 3.8.1 Control module manufacturing data ... This also includes a self-test of the analyzer(s) or analyzer module(s)

6- 8 NGA 2000 HAS64E-IM-SW39(1) [NGA-e (HFID-Software 3.9.x)] 08/10

“Auto ignition parameters” submenu This submenu allows parameters to be checked and adjusted for the auto ignition.

ch. 6.1.2.6, page 6-19

“Self test” submenu Accesses the “Self test results” menu.

ch. 6.1.2.7, page 6-21

“Software diagnostics” submenu Displays the latest software error messages.

ch. 6.1.2.8, page 6-23

“Start up analyzer” submenu Displays certain parameters and enables the rebooting of the unit and the initializing of the EEPROM.

ch. 6.1.2.9, page 6-25

Changing to a submenu ⇒ Press the ↑ -key or the ↓ -key until the appropriate menu item is displayed against a

black background. ⇒ Press the ↵ -key or the → -key to change to the submenu.

Page 117: Software Version 3.9 - Emerson€¦ · Software Version 3.9.x ... 3- 6 3.8.1 Control module manufacturing data ... This also includes a self-test of the analyzer(s) or analyzer module(s)

System configuration and diagnostics: 6.1.2.1 Power supply voltages

Main menu ↓

System configuration and diagnostics ↓

Diagnostic menus ↓

Analyzer module diagnostics ↓

Power supply voltages ↓

HOME ESCAPE

HFID_WO1000001

F1 F2 F3 F4 F5

6.28 ppmAnalyzer diagnostics

Power supply voltages +15V analog is: +15V analog was: -15V analog is: -15V analog was: +10V preamp reference is: +10V preamp reference was: +10V sensor reference is: +10V sensor reference was: Polarizing voltage is: Polarizing voltage was:

15.02 V 15.22 V

-15.20 V -15.34 V 9.990 V 9.971 V 10.01 V 10.03 V 89.48 V 91.74 V

In this menu current values are displayed as “...is” parameters and the manufacturer’s settings as “...was” parameters.

HAS64E-IM-SW39(1) [NGA-e (HFID-Software 3.9.x)] 08/10 NGA 2000 6 - 9

Page 118: Software Version 3.9 - Emerson€¦ · Software Version 3.9.x ... 3- 6 3.8.1 Control module manufacturing data ... This also includes a self-test of the analyzer(s) or analyzer module(s)

6- 10 NGA 2000 HAS64E-IM-SW39(1) [NGA-e (HFID-Software 3.9.x)] 08/10

Page 119: Software Version 3.9 - Emerson€¦ · Software Version 3.9.x ... 3- 6 3.8.1 Control module manufacturing data ... This also includes a self-test of the analyzer(s) or analyzer module(s)

System configuration and diagnostics: 6.1.2.2 Primary variable parameters

Main menu ↓

System configuration and diagnostics ↓

Diagnostic menus ↓

Analyzer module diagnostics ↓

Primary variable parameters ↓

HOME ESCAPE

HFID_WO1000001

F1 F2 F3 F4 F5

6.28 ppmPrimary variable parameters

Raw measurement signal: Signal gain setting: Preamp gain setting: Pk-pk noise: Barometric pressure compensation: Calibration factors...

531714

LOW LOW

10.00 ppm

DISABLED

This menu displays the parameters which the HFID uses internally to calculate the concentration signal.

Menu items

“Raw measurement signal” parameter Shows the current raw measurement signal.

“Signal/Preamp gain settings” parameters Indicate the state of the signal amplifier and preamplifier. These values depend on:

the current measurement range the current sample gas pressure the capillaries installed the HC response factor the fuel gas type

“Pk-pk noise” parameter The value of this parameter is only valid for a stable signal.

“Barometric pressure compensation” parameter When this function is enabled, the air pressure measured by another analyzer will be sent to the HFID via an interface and used for pressure compensation.

“Calibration factors” submenu ch. 5.1.1, page 5-9.

HAS64E-IM-SW39(1) [NGA-e (HFID-Software 3.9.x)] 08/10 NGA 2000 6 - 11

Page 120: Software Version 3.9 - Emerson€¦ · Software Version 3.9.x ... 3- 6 3.8.1 Control module manufacturing data ... This also includes a self-test of the analyzer(s) or analyzer module(s)

6- 12 NGA 2000 HAS64E-IM-SW39(1) [NGA-e (HFID-Software 3.9.x)] 08/10

Enabling and disabling barometric pressure compensation ⇒ Press the ↑ -key or the ↓ -key until the “Barometric pressure compensation” item is

displayed against a black background. ⇒ Select the item by pressing the ↵ -key or the → -key. ⇒ Press the ↑ -key or the ↓ -key to set the parameter to “DISABLED” or “ENABLED”. ⇒ Confirm the new value with the ↵ -key or cancel the changes and return to the previous

value by pressing F2 (Back).

Changing to the “Calibration factors” submenu ⇒ Press the ↑ -key or the ↓ -key until the “Calibration factors” item is displayed against a

black background. ⇒ Press the ↵ -key or the → -key to change to the submenu.

Page 121: Software Version 3.9 - Emerson€¦ · Software Version 3.9.x ... 3- 6 3.8.1 Control module manufacturing data ... This also includes a self-test of the analyzer(s) or analyzer module(s)

System configuration and diagnostics: 6.1.2.3 Physical measurement parameters

Main menu ↓

System configuration and diagnostics ↓

Diagnostic menus ↓

Analyzer module diagnostics ↓

Physical measurement parameters ↓

HOME ESCAPE MORE

HFID_WO1000001

F1 F2 F3 F4 F5

6.28 ppmPhysical measurement parameters

Sample capillary pressure: Sample capillary pressure was: Fuel supply pressure: Fuel supply pressure was: Purge gas pressure: Purge gas pressure was: Burner air pressure: Burner air pressure was: Pressure limits... Temperature limits...

230 hPa 340 hPa

1615 hPa 2000 hPa 689 hPa 691 hPa

1032 hPa 1643 hPa

This menu displays the current measurement parameters. Manufacturer’s settings are displayed as “...was” parameters. Press F3 (“MORE” to see additional parameters:

Bypass sample flow Case temperature Flame temperature Preamplifier temperature Burner air flow Burner fuel flow

Menu items

“Pressure limits” submenu This menu allows pressure limits to be displayed and adjusted.

“Temperature limits” submenu This menu allows temperature limits to be displayed and adjusted.

HAS64E-IM-SW39(1) [NGA-e (HFID-Software 3.9.x)] 08/10 NGA 2000 6 - 13

Page 122: Software Version 3.9 - Emerson€¦ · Software Version 3.9.x ... 3- 6 3.8.1 Control module manufacturing data ... This also includes a self-test of the analyzer(s) or analyzer module(s)

6- 14 NGA 2000 HAS64E-IM-SW39(1) [NGA-e (HFID-Software 3.9.x)] 08/10

Adjusting settings ⇒ Press the ↑ -key or the ↓ -key until the appropriate menu item is displayed against a

black background. ⇒ Select the item by pressing the ↵ -key or the → -key. ⇒ Set the new value with the ↑ -key or the ↓ -key. A single digit can be selected using the

← -key or the → -key. ⇒ Confirm the new value with the ↵ -key or cancel the changes and return to the previous

value by pressing F2 (Back).

Changing to a submenu ⇒ Press the ↑ -key or the ↓ -key until the appropriate menu item is displayed against a

black background. ⇒ Press the ↵ -key or the → -key to change to the submenu.

Page 123: Software Version 3.9 - Emerson€¦ · Software Version 3.9.x ... 3- 6 3.8.1 Control module manufacturing data ... This also includes a self-test of the analyzer(s) or analyzer module(s)

System configuration and diagnostics: 6.1.2.4 Temperature control parameters

Main menu ↓

System configurations and diagnostics ↓

Diagnostic menus ↓

Analyzer module diagnostics ↓

Temperature control parameters ↓

HOME ESCAPE

HFID_WO1000001

F1 F2 F3 F4 F5

6.28 ppmTemperature control

Oven set point: Oven P gain: Oven I gain: Oven bias: Oven temperature: Oven controller duty cycle: Oven heater control:

191.0 C

0.1000000 0.0002000

0.5 C 191.8 C

66 %

ON

This menu displays the parameters of the PID controller.

HAS64E-IM-SW39(1) [NGA-e (HFID-Software 3.9.x)] 08/10 NGA 2000 6 - 15

Page 124: Software Version 3.9 - Emerson€¦ · Software Version 3.9.x ... 3- 6 3.8.1 Control module manufacturing data ... This also includes a self-test of the analyzer(s) or analyzer module(s)

6- 16 NGA 2000 HAS64E-IM-SW39(1) [NGA-e (HFID-Software 3.9.x)] 08/10

Page 125: Software Version 3.9 - Emerson€¦ · Software Version 3.9.x ... 3- 6 3.8.1 Control module manufacturing data ... This also includes a self-test of the analyzer(s) or analyzer module(s)

System configuration and diagnostics: 6.1.2.5 Miscellaneous control parameters

Main menu ↓

System configuration and diagnostics ↓

Diagnostic menus ↓

Analyzer module diagnostics ↓

Miscellaneous control parameters ↓

HOME ESCAPE MORE

HFID_WO1000001

F1 F2 F3 F4 F5

6.28 ppmMiscellaneous control parameters

Oven heater current: Case heater current: Burner air valve current: Alarm messages valid for: Ignition command status: Fuel enrichment status: Flame status: Purge gas switch: Igniter status: Fuel type:

2080 mA 232mA 0.2 mA

FAILURE OFF OFF ON

OFF ON

H2-He

This menu displays various control parameters. Press F2 (“MORE”) to change to the next page to see the following parameters:

Fuel solenoid status Purge control status Fuel pressure status Operational sample pressure

Editable parameters

“Alarm messages valid for” parameter The HFID issues an alarm under certain circumstances. These circumstances can be divided into three different groups: safety failure, failure and warning. This parameter determines when an alarm is to be issued. The options are:

ANY SAFETY FAILURE FAILURE WARNING

“Fuel type” parameter The fuel for the flame is either hydrogen, or hydrogen mixed with helium or nitrogen. The correct fuel type must be set here; otherwise the HFID will calculate the gas concentration wrongly. The options are:

H2 hydrogen (H2) H2-N2 hydrogen and nitrogen (H2/N2) H2-He hydrogen and helium (H2/He)

HAS64E-IM-SW39(1) [NGA-e (HFID-Software 3.9.x)] 08/10 NGA 2000 6 - 17

Page 126: Software Version 3.9 - Emerson€¦ · Software Version 3.9.x ... 3- 6 3.8.1 Control module manufacturing data ... This also includes a self-test of the analyzer(s) or analyzer module(s)

6- 18 NGA 2000 HAS64E-IM-SW39(1) [NGA-e (HFID-Software 3.9.x)] 08/10

“Operational sample pressure” parameter Manual ignition is possible using the switch on the front panel of the HFID module. For this to work, the operational sample pressure must be set to a value at which the analyzer should operate. To avoid saturation problems, this parameter should be set to a higher pressure than any the HFID is likely to be exposed to.

Adjusting settings ⇒ Press the ↑ -key or the ↓ -key until the appropriate menu item is displayed against a

black background. ⇒ Select the item by pressing the ↵ -key or the → -key. ⇒ Set the new value with the ↑ -key or the ↓ -key. A single digit can be selected using the

← -key or the → -key. ⇒ Confirm the new value with the ↵ -key or cancel the changes and return to the previous

value by pressing F2 (Back).

Page 127: Software Version 3.9 - Emerson€¦ · Software Version 3.9.x ... 3- 6 3.8.1 Control module manufacturing data ... This also includes a self-test of the analyzer(s) or analyzer module(s)

System configuration and diagnostics: 6.1.2.6 Auto ignition parameters

Main menu ↓

System configuration and diagnostics ↓

Diagnostic menus ↓

Analyzer module diagnostics ↓

Auto ignition parameters ↓

HOME ESCAPE

HFID_WO1000001

F1 F2 F3 F4 F5

6.28 ppmAuto ignition parameters

Auto fuel override duration: Auto ignite override duration: Auto ignition number of cycles: Auto ignition: Fuel enrichment status: Flame status:

60 s

5 s 3

ENABLED

OFF

ON

In this menu the parameters for the auto ignition can be set.

Menu items

“Auto fuel override duration” parameter This determines the duration of the ignition cycle. Any value between 5 and 120 seconds can be set.

“Auto ignite override duration” parameter This determines how long the glow-plug should be active during an ignition attempt. Any value between 2 and 10 seconds can be set.

A duration of more than 5 seconds should be avoided, as this can cause the glow plug to burn out.

“Auto ignition number of cycles” parameter The HFID can be configured so that in the event of an ignition attempt failing, a new attempt can be started. The maximum number of attempts can be set in this line to any value between 1 and 5.

“Auto ignition” parameter Enables or disables auto ignition.

“Fuel enrichment status” and “Flame status” parameters Display the status of the fuel enrichment and flame. These parameters are read-only.

HAS64E-IM-SW39(1) [NGA-e (HFID-Software 3.9.x)] 08/10 NGA 2000 6 - 19

Page 128: Software Version 3.9 - Emerson€¦ · Software Version 3.9.x ... 3- 6 3.8.1 Control module manufacturing data ... This also includes a self-test of the analyzer(s) or analyzer module(s)

6- 20 NGA 2000 HAS64E-IM-SW39(1) [NGA-e (HFID-Software 3.9.x)] 08/10

Adjusting settings ⇒ Press the ↑ -key or the ↓ -key until the appropriate menu item is displayed against a

black background. ⇒ Select the item by pressing the ↵ -key or the → -key. ⇒ Set the new value with the ↑ -key or the ↓ -key. A single digit can be selected using the

← -key or the → -key. ⇒ Confirm the new value with the ↵ -key or cancel the changes and return to the previous

value by pressing F2 (Back).

Page 129: Software Version 3.9 - Emerson€¦ · Software Version 3.9.x ... 3- 6 3.8.1 Control module manufacturing data ... This also includes a self-test of the analyzer(s) or analyzer module(s)

System configuration and diagnostics: 6.1.2.7 Self test results

Main menu ↓

System configuration and diagnostics ↓

Diagnostic menus ↓

Analyzer module diagnostics ↓

Analyzer self test ↓

HOME ESCAPE TEST

HFID_WO1000001

F1 F2 F3 F4 F5

6.28 ppmSelf test results EEPROM test: EPROM test: RAM test: Power supply test: Network test: 20 bit ADC test: 12 bit ADC test: Power supply board test: Safety board test: Case temperature test: Oven/sample temperature test

Pass Pass Pass Pass Pass Pass Pass Pass Pass Pass Pass

This menu displays the results of the analyzer self test. Any errors are listed here. “Pass” indicates no error. A new self test can be started by pressing F3 (“TEST”). If errors are not resolved, please contact our customer services.

Possible error sources The following lists only a few of the possible causes of errors.

Error in the “Power supply test” line This could indicate a malfunctioning power supply unit.

Error in the “20 bit ADC test” line The cause may be a malfunctioning preamplifier.

Error in the “Safety board test” line The source of this error could be a problem in the safety board itself or in the processor.

Errors in other lines may indicate a malfunctioning processor.

HAS64E-IM-SW39(1) [NGA-e (HFID-Software 3.9.x)] 08/10 NGA 2000 6 - 21

Page 130: Software Version 3.9 - Emerson€¦ · Software Version 3.9.x ... 3- 6 3.8.1 Control module manufacturing data ... This also includes a self-test of the analyzer(s) or analyzer module(s)

6- 22 NGA 2000 HAS64E-IM-SW39(1) [NGA-e (HFID-Software 3.9.x)] 08/10

Page 131: Software Version 3.9 - Emerson€¦ · Software Version 3.9.x ... 3- 6 3.8.1 Control module manufacturing data ... This also includes a self-test of the analyzer(s) or analyzer module(s)

System configuration and diagnostics: 6.1.2.8 Software diagnostics

Main menu ↓

System configuration and diagnostics ↓

Diagnostic menus ↓

Analyzer module diagnostics ↓

Software diagnostics ↓

HOME ESCAPE

HFID_WO1000001

F1 F2 F3 F4 F5

6.28 ppmSoftware diagnostics

Last message: And: And: And: And: And: And: And: Edit to reset: Software error code (1 = no error)

Report 1

This menu shows any software error messages from the HFID analyzer module.

Procedure when errors are reported ⇒ Note error(s). ⇒ Set the “Edit to reset” parameter to “Reset”.

If the errors remain: ⇒ Press F5 (“Reset”) to change to the “System reset” menu. Reset the system by pressing

the ↵ -key or the → -key. ⇒ Following the system reset return to the “Control module diagnostics” menu. ⇒ Check for error messages. ⇒ If error messages are still listed, please contact our customer services.

If errors are no longer being reported in this list, reset the “Edit to reset” parameter to “Report”.

Setting the “Edit to reset” parameter ⇒ Select the item by pressing the ↵ -key or the → -key. ⇒ Set the new value with the ↑ -key or the ↓ -key. ⇒ Confirm the new value with the ↵ -key. HAS64E-IM-SW39(1) [NGA-e (HFID-Software 3.9.x)] 08/10 NGA 2000 6 - 23

Page 132: Software Version 3.9 - Emerson€¦ · Software Version 3.9.x ... 3- 6 3.8.1 Control module manufacturing data ... This also includes a self-test of the analyzer(s) or analyzer module(s)

6- 24 NGA 2000 HAS64E-IM-SW39(1) [NGA-e (HFID-Software 3.9.x)] 08/10

Page 133: Software Version 3.9 - Emerson€¦ · Software Version 3.9.x ... 3- 6 3.8.1 Control module manufacturing data ... This also includes a self-test of the analyzer(s) or analyzer module(s)

System configuration and diagnostics: 6.1.2.9 Analyzer start up

Main menu ↓

System configuration and diagnostics ↓

Diagnostic menus ↓

Analyzer module diagnostics ↓

Start up analyzer ↓

HOME LIGHT REBOOT INIT

HFID_WO1000001

F1 F2 F3 F4 F5

6.28 ppmAnalyzer starting up

Purge gas timer - secs: Purge gas pressure: Purge gas switch: Purge control status: Burner air pressure: Fuel pressure: Fuel solenoid status: Oven temperature: Flame temperature: Flame condition: Time on this cycle - secs:

60 691 hPa

ON ON

1042 hPa 1643 hPa

OFF 191.1 C

279 C ON

0

This menu displays various parameters relevant for flame ignition. It also allows the module to be rebooted, the EEPROM to be cleared and the flame to be manually ignited. If the analyzer determines that the system must be purged (e.g. when the unit is powered up), the purge cycle is initiated. This must terminate successfully before the unit will allow the flame to be lit. During the purge cycle the purge gas timer counts the seconds; if this counter does not increment, the unit cannot be purged. This may be the case when, for example:

the purge gas pressure is too low (at least 680 hPa are required); the purge gas flow is too low (approx. 16 to 18 l/min are required); or there is no difference in pressure between the inside and outside of the casing (e.g.

when the casing is not airtight). As soon as the conditions for a purge cycle are met, the cycle is initiated.

Function keys

“LIGHT” function key (F2) When the auto ignition is enabled, the flame is automatically lit following the fuel enrichment cycle; otherwise the HFID stands by until the flame is ignited manually.

“REBOOT” function key (F3) Reboots the HFID. This is equivalent to manually powering down and then powering up the analyzer.

HAS64E-IM-SW39(1) [NGA-e (HFID-Software 3.9.x)] 08/10 NGA 2000 6 - 25

Page 134: Software Version 3.9 - Emerson€¦ · Software Version 3.9.x ... 3- 6 3.8.1 Control module manufacturing data ... This also includes a self-test of the analyzer(s) or analyzer module(s)

6- 26 NGA 2000 HAS64E-IM-SW39(1) [NGA-e (HFID-Software 3.9.x)] 08/10

“INIT” function key (F4) Deletes all the data from the EEPROM, except for the manufacturer data.

This function returns the analyzer to its original condition. It must then be set up again from scratch.

Page 135: Software Version 3.9 - Emerson€¦ · Software Version 3.9.x ... 3- 6 3.8.1 Control module manufacturing data ... This also includes a self-test of the analyzer(s) or analyzer module(s)

System configuration and diagnostics: 6.2 Load/Save configuration (CM/MCA)

Main menu ↓

System configuration and diagnostics ↓

Load/Save configuration (CM/MCA) ↓

Measure Back...

HFID_WO1000001

F1 F2 F3 F4 F5

6.28 ppm-- Load/Save Configuration (CM/MCA) --

Send configuration to serial interface ! Load configuration from serial interface !

- BE CAREFUL with this function - Replace current configuration with factory settings !

In this menu the current configuration can be sent to the serial interface, and configuration data can be loaded from the serial interface.

Menu items

“Send configuration to serial interface” command line The configuration data is sent to the serial interface.

“Load configuration from serial interface” command line Configuration data is downloaded from the serial interface and stored.

“Replace current configuration with factory settings” command line Saved configuration data is deleted and replaced by the manufacturer’s settings.

This will permanently delete all current values. The unit must then be reconfigured.

Executing commands ⇒ Press the ↑ -key or the ↓ -key until the appropriate command line is displayed against a

black background. ⇒ Press they ↵ -key or the → -key to execute the command. HAS64E-IM-SW39(1) [NGA-e (HFID-Software 3.9.x)] 08/10 NGA 2000 6 - 27

Page 136: Software Version 3.9 - Emerson€¦ · Software Version 3.9.x ... 3- 6 3.8.1 Control module manufacturing data ... This also includes a self-test of the analyzer(s) or analyzer module(s)

6- 28 NGA 2000 HAS64E-IM-SW39(1) [NGA-e (HFID-Software 3.9.x)] 08/10

Page 137: Software Version 3.9 - Emerson€¦ · Software Version 3.9.x ... 3- 6 3.8.1 Control module manufacturing data ... This also includes a self-test of the analyzer(s) or analyzer module(s)

System configuration and diagnostics: 6.3 Date and time

Main menu ↓

System configuration and diagnostics ↓

Date and time ↓

Measure Set! Back...

HFID_WO1000001

F1 F2 F3 F4 F5

6.28 ppm-- Date and Time --

Minutes: Hours: Year: Day: Month: _____________________________________________ Network updating: Current time:

32 21

2005 20 10

Enabled

21:32:16 August 16, 2009

This menu contains settings for the control module’s system clock.

Menu items and function keys

“Minutes” and “Hours” parameters These parameters set the time. Hours are in 24-hour format (“military time”): e.g. “13” = 1 pm, “14” = 2 pm, “0” = midnight.

“Year” parameter This parameter sets the current year. Any value between 1996 and 2035 can be set.

“Day” parameter This parameter sets the calendar day. The maximum value depends on the month currently set: 28 for February (29 in a leap year); 30 for April, June, September and November; 31 for all other months.

“Month” parameter The parameter sets the month as a value between 1 (for January) and 12 (for December).

“Network updating” parameter Indicates whether all the modules connected to the platform or HFID analyzer can access the control module date and time.

“Current time” parameter Indicates the current time according to the system clock. The new setting takes effect when the “Set” command (F3) is executed. This parameter is updated every 5 seconds.

“Set” function key (F3) Replaces the current system time with the values set in this menu.

HAS64E-IM-SW39(1) [NGA-e (HFID-Software 3.9.x)] 0810 NGA 2000 6 - 29

Page 138: Software Version 3.9 - Emerson€¦ · Software Version 3.9.x ... 3- 6 3.8.1 Control module manufacturing data ... This also includes a self-test of the analyzer(s) or analyzer module(s)

6- 30 NGA 2000 HAS64E-IM-SW39(1) [NGA-e (HFID-Software 3.9.x)] 08/10

Setting values ⇒ Press the ↑ -key or the ↓ -key until the appropriate menu item is displayed against a

black background. ⇒ Select the item by pressing the ↵ -key or the → -key. ⇒ Set the new value with the ↑ -key or the ↓ -key. A single digit can be selected using the

← -key or the → -key. ⇒ Confirm the new value with the ↵ -key or cancel the changes and return to the previous

value by pressing F2 (Back).

Page 139: Software Version 3.9 - Emerson€¦ · Software Version 3.9.x ... 3- 6 3.8.1 Control module manufacturing data ... This also includes a self-test of the analyzer(s) or analyzer module(s)

System configuration and diagnostics: 6.4 Security codes

Main menu ↓

System configuration and diagnostics ↓

Security codes ↓

Measure Back...

HFID_WO1000001

F1 F2 F3 F4 F5

6.28 ppm-- Security Codes --

Basic level security: Expert level security: System level security: Define basic level security PIN... Define expert level security PIN... Define system level security PIN...

Disabled

Disabled

Disabled

The menu allows a separate security code for basic functions, expert controls and system configuration to be defined and enabled.

If security is enabled and the codes forgotten, security for the locked level must be deactivated in this menu. Since this menu is in the system level there will be no way to access the locked area if system level access is also locked. Make sure you do not lose the security code for system level access.

Menu items

“Basic/Expert/System level security” parameters In these lines security for each of the three levels can be enabled or disabled. The levels are equivalent to the following entries in the main menu:

Basic level “Analyzer basic controls (calibration) & setup” Expert level “Analyzer and I/O, expert controls & setup” System level “System configuration and diagnostics”

No other functions can be locked.

“Define basic/expert/system level security PIN” Accesses a submenu which allows the definition of the code numbers. The default values are:

Basic level 12345 Expert level 12345 System level 54321

HAS64E-IM-SW39(1) [NGA-e (HFID-Software 3.9.x)] 08/10 NGA 2000 6 - 31

Page 140: Software Version 3.9 - Emerson€¦ · Software Version 3.9.x ... 3- 6 3.8.1 Control module manufacturing data ... This also includes a self-test of the analyzer(s) or analyzer module(s)

Defining the PINs The procedure is the same for all three areas. The basic level is used here as an example. The following menu appears on selecting and confirming the appropriate menu item:

6- 32 NGA 2000 HAS64E-IM-SW39(1) [NGA-e (HFID-Software 3.9.x)] 08/10

ABCDE1 FGHIJ2 KLMNO3 PQRST4 UVWXYZ5

HFID_WO1000001

F1 F2 F3 F4 F5

6.28 ppm-- Define Basic Level Security PIN --

Press five softkeys in any order to define the PIN.

The actual PIN is represented by the order in which

they are pressed, and shown numerically below.

Press the left arrow key when you are done.

Actual PIN:

12345

Procedure ⇒ Enter the desired code using the function keys. The PIN appears in numerical form in the

“Actual PIN” parameter. Although letters are shown above each key, the PIN itself contains only digits.

⇒ Press as many function keys as necessary to define the five-digit PIN. When this is done, press the ← -key to return to the “Security Codes” menu.

⇒ Once all the security codes have been set and security for the appropriate level or levels has been enabled, return to the main menu and press F4 (“Lock”). On being prompted to press “Yes”, press F2 (“Yes”) and then F4 (“Back”).

Changing to a locked level If an attempt to access a particular level is met with a prompt for a PIN, this level is locked and can only be accessed using the correct security code.

Procedure ⇒ Enter the security code using the function keys. The parameter “Input” initially displays

the word “Ready”; this is replaced with an asterisk for each correctly entered digit. If the code entered is incorrect, this parameter returns to the “Ready” state and the level remains locked. If the PIN entered is correct, the display will automatically change to the menu of the level being accessed.

Entering a correct PIN will unlock the level permanently. To lock the level again, return to the main menu and press F4 (“Lock”).

Page 141: Software Version 3.9 - Emerson€¦ · Software Version 3.9.x ... 3- 6 3.8.1 Control module manufacturing data ... This also includes a self-test of the analyzer(s) or analyzer module(s)

System configuration and diagnostics: 6.5 Network module management

Main menu ↓

System configuration and diagnostics ↓

Network module management ↓

Measure Back...

HFID_WO1000001

F1 F2 F3 F4 F5

6.28 ppm-- Network Module Management --

List of active modules... Memory usage... Automatic bind of I/O-modules: Bind modules... Erase inactive modules... Replace modules...

Note: Re-initializing will destroy all the binds. Re-initialize network !

No

This menu allows microprocessor-controlled I/O units of the following types to be connected to the analyzer:

Analog output with 3 alarms Autocalibration I/O modules System autocalibration I/O modules

I/O modules are no longer available. Old modules can still be connected to this platform, and so this chapter is included for the sake of completeness.

Menu items

“List of active modules” submenu Displays a list of all available modules. If more modules are connected than can be displayed on one page, browse through the list using F3 (“<<<”) and F5 (“>>>”).

“Memory usage” submenu When a module is connected to the unit for the first time, it is installed; i.e. data is downloaded and saved. The “Memory usage” submenu shows all installed modules and the memory they are currently using. This can be used to check for unused modules which are unnecessarily taking up memory. If necessary, use F3 (“<<<”) and F5 (“>>>”) to browse through the list.

“Automatic bind of I/O modules” parameter If this parameter is set to “Yes”, modules that are connected are automatically bound to the platform. It is recommended to disable this option when more than one platform is connected to a network.

HAS64E-IM-SW39(1) [NGA-e (HFID-Software 3.9.x)] 08/10 NGA 2000 6 - 33

Page 142: Software Version 3.9 - Emerson€¦ · Software Version 3.9.x ... 3- 6 3.8.1 Control module manufacturing data ... This also includes a self-test of the analyzer(s) or analyzer module(s)

“Bind modules” submenu Once a module has been installed, it must be bound to the platform before it can be used. If automatic bind is disabled, the procedure is performed manually in the “Module binding” menu, accessed via this line.

“Erase inactive modules” submenu Even when a module is no longer physically connected, the data downloaded when it was installed remain and unnecessarily use up memory. The “Erase inactive modules” submenu allows the deletion of unused data in order to free up memory space.

“Replace modules” submenu If a module is to be replaced (e.g. due to a malfunction), the new module is not automatically recognized as a replacement for the old, since all modules have a unique ID. The “Replace modules” submenu allows the replacement of the old module with the new.

“Re-initialize network” command line This command re-initializes the network and destroys all binds.

This command not only destroys the binds but also deletes all configuration data for SIO and DIO modules.

Procedure to bind modules ⇒ Access the “Module binding” submenu via the “Bind modules” item. ⇒ Select the tag of the analyzer module to which the module is to be bound. The display

changes to the “Select I/O modules” menu, which lists all the I/O modules connected. If necessary, use F3 (“<<<”) and F4 (“>>>”) to browse through the list.

⇒ Select the I/O module to be bound. The display returns to the “Module binding” menu. The selected I/O module appears listed below the tag of the analyzer module to which it is to be bound.

⇒ Repeat the procedure until all modules to be bound are selected. ⇒ Press F4 (“Bind!”). A brief message will be displayed. Confirm by pressing F3 (“Bind!”).

Procedure to erase inactive modules ⇒ Change to the “Erase inactive modules” submenu, then access the “Choose module”

submenu. Installed I/O modules will be displayed along with the memory they are using. ⇒ Select a module to be erased. The display returns to the “Erase inactive modules” menu

and the selected module appears in the “Chosen module” line. ⇒ Press F3 (“Erase!”) to erase the module.

6- 34 NGA 2000 HAS64E-IM-SW39(1) [NGA-e (HFID-Software 3.9.x)] 08/10

Page 143: Software Version 3.9 - Emerson€¦ · Software Version 3.9.x ... 3- 6 3.8.1 Control module manufacturing data ... This also includes a self-test of the analyzer(s) or analyzer module(s)

System configuration and diagnostics: 6.5 Network module management

Procedure to replace modules ⇒ Change to the “Replace modules” submenu and then access the “Choose old module”

submenu. ⇒ Select the module to be replaced. The display returns to the “Replace modules” menu

and the selected module appears in the “Chosen old module” line. ⇒ Change to the “Choose new module” line. ⇒ Select the new module. The display returns to the “Replace modules” menu and the new

module appears in the “Chosen new module” line. ⇒ Press F3 (“Replace!”) to replace the old module with the new.

Enabling and disabling the automatic binding of I/O modules ⇒ In the “Network module management” menu, press the ↑ -key or the ↓ -key until the

“Automatic bind of I/O modules” item is displayed against a black background. ⇒ Select the item by pressing the ↵ -key or the → -key. ⇒ Press the ↑ -key or the ↓ -key to set the parameter to “Yes” or “No”. ⇒ Confirm the new value with the ↵ -key or cancel the changes and return to the previous

value by pressing F2 (Back).

Re-initializing the network ⇒ In the “Network module management” menu, press the ↑ -key or the ↓ -key until the “Re-

initialize network” item is displayed against a black background. ⇒ Execute the command with the ↵ -key or the → -key.

Changing to a submenu ⇒ Press the ↑ -key or the ↓ -key until the appropriate menu item is displayed against a

black background. ⇒ Press the ↵ -key or the → -key to change to the submenu.

Selecting an analyzer or I/O module ⇒ Press the ↑ -key or the ↓ -key until the appropriate item is displayed against a black

background. ⇒ Confirm the selection with the ↵ -key or the → -key.

HAS64E-IM-SW39(1) [NGA-e (HFID-Software 3.9.x)] 08/10 NGA 2000 6 - 35

Page 144: Software Version 3.9 - Emerson€¦ · Software Version 3.9.x ... 3- 6 3.8.1 Control module manufacturing data ... This also includes a self-test of the analyzer(s) or analyzer module(s)

6- 36 NGA 2000 HAS64E-IM-SW39(1) [NGA-e (HFID-Software 3.9.x)] 08/10

Page 145: Software Version 3.9 - Emerson€¦ · Software Version 3.9.x ... 3- 6 3.8.1 Control module manufacturing data ... This also includes a self-test of the analyzer(s) or analyzer module(s)

System configuration and diagnostics: 6.6 Measurement display setup

Main menu ↓

System configuration and diagnostics ↓

Measurement display setup ↓

Measure Signals Back... More...

HFID_WO1000001

F1 F2 F3 F4 F5

6.28 ppm-- Measurement display setup (1/2) --

Choose component module... Mode for mini-bargraph 1: Mode for mini-bargraph 2: Mode for mini-bargraph 3: Mode for mini-bargraph 4: Signal on mini-bargraph 1: Signal on mini-bargraph 2: Signal on mini-bargraph 3: Signal on mini-bargraph 4: Selected component module:

Analyzer selected Analyzer selected Analyzer selected Analyzer selected

1 1 1 1

HFID_WO1000001

This menu allows the setting up of the measurement display. The second page of this menu can be accessed by pressing F5 (“More”).

Menu items

“Choose component module” submenu Accesses a submenu which lists all available modules. The selected module then appears in the “Selected component module” line.

“Mode for mini-bargraph 1/2/3/4” parameters Determine which mode each mini-bargraph is to operate in. Available options are:

Platform selected: The signal comes from the platform Analyzer selected: The signal comes from the analyzer Disabled: The mini-bargraph is switched off

“Signal on mini-bargraph 1/2/3/4” parameters Each “platform selected” mini-bargraph can be assigned a signal. These signals are set in the “Assign mini-bargraph signals” submenu, accessed via F3 (“Signals”).

“Add status to concentration measurement” parameter If this parameter is set to “Yes”, the measurement display includes a symbol indicating the status of the analyzer.

“Displayed concentration digits” and “Digits after decimal point” parameters These parameters determine the formatting of the numerical measurement display.

HAS64E-IM-SW39(1) [NGA-e (HFID-Software 3.9.x)] 08/10 NGA 2000 6 - 37

Page 146: Software Version 3.9 - Emerson€¦ · Software Version 3.9.x ... 3- 6 3.8.1 Control module manufacturing data ... This also includes a self-test of the analyzer(s) or analyzer module(s)

6- 38 NGA 2000 HAS64E-IM-SW39(1) [NGA-e (HFID-Software 3.9.x)] 08/10

Assigning mini-bargraph signals Pressing F3 (“Signals”) accesses the “Assign mini-bargraph signals” submenu.

Menu items

“Signal number” parameter Here the signal number is selected. A specific signal can be set to this number.

“Choose signal source module” submenu Displays a list of available signal sources. Here a source is selected which then appears in the “Signal comes from line”.

“Choose signal” submenu Displays a list of signals that can be sent from the source module. The selected signal then appears in the “Signal name” line.

“Signal description” parameter This line allows the signal description to be edited.

Adjusting settings ⇒ Press the ↑ -key or the ↓ -key until the appropriate menu item is displayed against a

black background. ⇒ Select the item by pressing the ↵ -key or the → -key. ⇒ Set the new value with the ↑ -key or the ↓ -key. In the “Signal description” line a specific

character can be selected using the ← -key or the → -key. ⇒ Confirm the new value with the ↵ -key or cancel the changes and return to the previous

value by pressing F2 (Back). The following characters are available for the signal description:

Letters A to Z and a to z Digits 0 to 9 The following characters: ↑ ↓ → ← ∟ ↔ ▲ ▼ ! " # $ % & ´ ( ) * + , - . / ; < = > ? @ [ \ ]

^ _ ` { ¦ } ~ Ç ü é á ä à â ç ê ë è ï î ì Ä Â É ff ô ö ò û ù ÿ Ö Ü ¢ £ ¥ × ƒ đ ñ © ß and the space character

Changing to a submenu ⇒ Press the ↑ -key or the ↓ -key until the appropriate menu item is displayed against a

black background. ⇒ Press the ↵ -key or the → -key to change to the submenu.

Selecting a module or a signal ⇒ Press the ↑ -key or the ↓ -key until the appropriate item is displayed against a black

background. ⇒ Confirm the selection with the ↵ -key or the → -key.

Page 147: Software Version 3.9 - Emerson€¦ · Software Version 3.9.x ... 3- 6 3.8.1 Control module manufacturing data ... This also includes a self-test of the analyzer(s) or analyzer module(s)

System configuration and diagnostics: 6.7 Miscellaneous

Main menu ↓

System configuration and diagnostics ↓

Miscellaneous ↓

Measure Back...

HFID_WO1000001

F1 F2 F3 F4 F5

6.28 ppm-- Miscellaneous --

System tag: Pump 1: Pump 2:

Emerson

Off Off

In this menu the pumps can be switched on or off and the system tag set.

Adjusting settings ⇒ Press the ↑ -key or the ↓ -key until the appropriate menu item is displayed against a

black background. ⇒ Select the item by pressing the ↵ -key or the → -key. ⇒ Set the new value with the ↑ -key or the ↓ -key. In the “System tag” line a specific

character can be selected using the ← -key or the → -key. ⇒ Confirm the new value with the ↵ -key or cancel the changes and return to the previous

value by pressing F2 (Back). The following characters are available for the system tag:

Letters A to Z and a to z Digits 0 to 9 The following characters: ↑ ↓ → ← ∟ ↔ ▲ ▼ ! " # $ % & ´ ( ) * + , - . / ; < = > ? @ [ \ ]

^ _ ` { ¦ } ~ Ç ü é á ä à â ç ê ë è ï î ì Ä Â É ff ô ö ò û ù ÿ Ö Ü ¢ £ ¥ × ƒ đ ñ © ß and the space character

HAS64E-IM-SW39(1) [NGA-e (HFID-Software 3.9.x)] 08/10 NGA 2000 6 - 39

Page 148: Software Version 3.9 - Emerson€¦ · Software Version 3.9.x ... 3- 6 3.8.1 Control module manufacturing data ... This also includes a self-test of the analyzer(s) or analyzer module(s)

6- 40 NGA 2000 HAS64E-IM-SW39(1) [NGA-e (HFID-Software 3.9.x)] 08/10

Page 149: Software Version 3.9 - Emerson€¦ · Software Version 3.9.x ... 3- 6 3.8.1 Control module manufacturing data ... This also includes a self-test of the analyzer(s) or analyzer module(s)

System configuration and diagnostics: 6.8 System reset

Main menu ↓

System configuration and diagnostics ↓

Reset (F2) ↓

Measure Back...

HFID_WO1000001

F1 F2 F3 F4 F5

6.28 ppm-- System Reset --

Are you sure ??? System reset !

This menu enables the system to be reset. This is equivalent to powering the unit down and then up. Press the ↵ -key or the → -key to reset the system. Press F1 (“Measure”) or F4 (“Back”) to cancel the system reset.

HAS64E-IM-SW39(1) [NGA-e (HFID-Software 3.9.x)] 08/10 NGA 2000 6 - 41

Page 150: Software Version 3.9 - Emerson€¦ · Software Version 3.9.x ... 3- 6 3.8.1 Control module manufacturing data ... This also includes a self-test of the analyzer(s) or analyzer module(s)

6- 42 NGA 2000 HAS64E-IM-SW39(1) [NGA-e (HFID-Software 3.9.x)] 08/10

Page 151: Software Version 3.9 - Emerson€¦ · Software Version 3.9.x ... 3- 6 3.8.1 Control module manufacturing data ... This also includes a self-test of the analyzer(s) or analyzer module(s)

Display controls: 7

Main menu ↓

Display controls ↓

Measure Back...

HFID_WO1000001

F1 F2 F3 F4 F5

6.28 ppm-- Display Controls --

Brightness: Contrast: Display measurement menu after: Default measurement menu: Switch off backlight after:

70 % 49 %

5 Min

Single component

Never

This menu allows various parameters for the LCD screen to be set.

Menu items

“Brightness” and “Contrast” parameters Determine the brightness and contrast of the LCD screen. The brightness can be set to any value between 20% and 100%. Normal values are between 70% and 90%. The contrast can be set to any value between 10% and 80%. Normal values are between 20% and 30%.

Take care with these settings. Extremely badly-chosen values may render the display illegible. There is no simple method to restore default values.

“Display measurement menu after” parameter Determines whether the display should return to the measurement menu after a specific period of time of inactivity (i.e., no keys being pressed). The following options are available: 10s, 30s, 1min, 5 min, 10 min, 30 min, Never.

“Default measurement menu” parameter Determines whether the single component display or the multi-component display should be used as the default measurement menu.

“Switch off backlight after” parameter Determines whether the LCD backlight should be switched off after a specific period of time of inactivity (i.e. no keys being pressed). The options are the same as those for the “Display measurement menu after” parameter.

HAS64E-IM-SW39(1) [NGA-e (HFID-Software 3.9.x)] 08/10 NGA 2000 7 - 1

Page 152: Software Version 3.9 - Emerson€¦ · Software Version 3.9.x ... 3- 6 3.8.1 Control module manufacturing data ... This also includes a self-test of the analyzer(s) or analyzer module(s)

7- 2 NGA 2000 HAS64E-IM-SW39(1) [NGA-e (HFID-Software 3.9.x)] 08/10

Adjusting settings ⇒ Press the ↑ -key or the ↓ -key until the appropriate menu item is displayed against a

black background. ⇒ Select the item by pressing the ↵ -key or the → -key. ⇒ Set the new value with the ↑ -key or the ↓ -key. A single digit can be selected using the

← -key or the → -key. ⇒ Confirm the new value with the ↵ -key or cancel the changes and return to the previous

value by pressing F2 (Back).

Page 153: Software Version 3.9 - Emerson€¦ · Software Version 3.9.x ... 3- 6 3.8.1 Control module manufacturing data ... This also includes a self-test of the analyzer(s) or analyzer module(s)

Calculator on Control Module Level

HAS64E-IM-SW39(1) [HFID Software 3.9.x] CM Calculator Page 1

Calculator on Control Module Level (Platform or MLT, CAT 200 or TFID Analyzer)

1 SYSTEM CALCULATOR (ON CONTROL MODULE LEVEL) …………………………….. 2 1.1 PRINCIPLE OF PROGRAM SET-UP...…………………………………………………………… 2 1.2 LIVE VALUES (REAL MEASURING VALUES).....………………………………………………… 4 1.3 CONSTANT VALUES …………………………………………………………………………… 5 1.4 MEMORY VALUES....……………………………………………………………………………. 5 1.5 MENU TREE FOR THE SYSTEM CALCULATOR ………………………………………………… 6 1.5.1 Submenu ‘Signals’ ………………………………………………………………………. 7 1.5.2 Submenu ‘Programming’ ……………………………………………………………….. 9

2 DISPLAY CALCULATOR RESULTS ON MINI-BARGRAPH ……………………………… 11 2.1 DISPLAY MODE..………………………………………………………………………….......... 11 2.2 ASSIGN SIGNALS AND CONVENIENT NAMES ………………………………………………….. 12

3 ASSIGNMENT TO SIO ANALOG OUTPUTS ………………………………………………... 14 PICTURE 1-1: SYSTEM CALCULATOR MENU ……………………………………………………………… 6 PICTURE 1-2: SIGNAL ASSIGNMENT OF SYSTEM CALCULATOR …………………………………………. 7 PICTURE 1-4: CONSTANT VALUE ASSIGNMENT ………………………………………………………….. 9 PICTURE 1-5: PROGRAMMING THE SYSTEM CALCULATOR ……………………………………………… 10 PICTURE 2-1: MEASUREMENT DISPLAY SET-UP …………………………………………………………. 11 PICTURE 2-2: PLATFORM SELECTED SIGNAL ASSIGNMENT ……………………………………………... 12 PICTURE 2-3: LISTING OF ASSIGNED SIGNAL …………………………………………………………….. 13 TABLE 1-1: THE OPERATORS OF THE SYSTEM CALCULATOR …………………………………………… 3 TABLE 1-2: LIVE VALUES POOL …………………………………………………………………………… 4

Page 154: Software Version 3.9 - Emerson€¦ · Software Version 3.9.x ... 3- 6 3.8.1 Control module manufacturing data ... This also includes a self-test of the analyzer(s) or analyzer module(s)

Calculator on Control Module Level

HAS64E-IM-SW39(1) [HFID Software 3.9.x] CM Calculator Page 2

1 System Calculator (on Control Module Level) 1.1 Principle of program set-up As it would be too high an effort to realize a comfortable mathematical formula system we created a syntax which is easy to input and easy to realize. As we assume that customers or service people have to set-up the program only one time for an installed system it should be acceptable to realize a form which is only done by inputting numbers. Therefore we have mainly to differ between positive and negative numbers. The program operations are assigned with negative numbers. The operands which are used by these input operations are positive numbers. These positive numbers symbolize signals which are part of a signal pool. Also we have to know that there are used different classes of operands. That means we have different classes of signal pools. Those are: • Live values (real measuring values) • Constant values • Memory values. In each of these classes exists an own numbering and we determine by the operator itself which class of these operands is meant. Remark: Opposite to former versions allowing calculator function within ONE MLT analyzer module (AM) or for ONE MLT analyzer (or CAT 200 and TFID analyzer respectively) ONLY now, the system calculator is based on the Control Module level (CM). This allows including ALL analyzer modules of MLT channels of a NGA 2000 analyzer system into the calculation such as CLD’s and HFID’s. The results of the system calculator can be put onto the 2-8 analog outputs of the programmable Input/ Output Module SIO. The SIO as a Control Module I/O is then located in a platform or in a MLT, CAT 200 or TFID Analyzer.

Page 155: Software Version 3.9 - Emerson€¦ · Software Version 3.9.x ... 3- 6 3.8.1 Control module manufacturing data ... This also includes a self-test of the analyzer(s) or analyzer module(s)

Calculator on Control Module Level

HAS64E-IM-SW39(1) [HFID Software 3.9.x] CM Calculator Page 3

In the following table we find all the currently available operators (negative numbers) and their meaning. Hereby is used the acronym “IR” for the actually calculated intermediate result of the program. Table 1-1: The Operators of the System Calculator

Operator Number

Acronym Description

-1 ADD I Add following live value operand to the IR (IR = IR +I) -2 SUB I Subtract following live value operand from IR (IR = IR – I) -3 DIV I Divide IR by following live value operand (IR = IR / I) -4 MUL I Multiply IR with following live value operand (IR = IR * I) -5 ADDC c Add following constant value operand from IR (IR = IR + c) -6 SUBC c Subtract following constant value operand from IR (IR = IR – c) -7 DIVC c Divide IR by following constant value operand (IR = IR / c) -8 MULC c Multiply IR with following constant value operand (IR = IR * c) -9 ADDM m Add following memory value operand to the IR (IR = IR + m)

-10 SUBM m Subtract following memory value operand to the IR (IR = IR – m) -11 DIVM m Divide IR by following memory value operand (IR = IR / m) -12 MULM m Multiply IR with following memory value operand (IR = IR * m) -13 STOM m Store IR at the following memory value and set IR = 0.0 (m = IR; IR = 0) -14 STOR r Store IR to following result and set IR = 0.0 (r = IR; IR = 0) -15 NOP No operation (placeholder) -16 ABS Convert IR into absolute value (IR = |IR|) -17 EOP End of program -18 SQRT Build square root of IR (IR = √IR) -19 NEG Negate IR (IR = -IR) -20 INC Increment IR (IR = IR + 1) -21 DEC Decrement IR (IR = IR – 1) -22 INV Invert IR (IR = 1 / IR) -23 EXP Exponential function (IR = eIR) -24 POWM IR raised to the power of the following memory value operand (IR = IRm) -25 IF>m1 m2 m3 If IR > 1st following memory value

Then IR = 2nd following memory value Else IR = 3rd following memory value

-26 IF<m1 m2 m3 If IR < 1st following memory value Then IR = 2nd following memory value Else IR = 3rd following memory value

-27 IF=m1 m2 m3 If IR = 1st following memory value Then IR = 2nd following memory value Else IR = 3rd following memory value

-28 LN Natural logarithm (IR = ln (IR)) -29 LOG Base 10 logarithm (IR = log (IR))

Page 156: Software Version 3.9 - Emerson€¦ · Software Version 3.9.x ... 3- 6 3.8.1 Control module manufacturing data ... This also includes a self-test of the analyzer(s) or analyzer module(s)

Calculator on Control Module Level

HAS64E-IM-SW39(1) [HFID Software 3.9.x] CM Calculator Page 4

1.2 Live values (real measuring values) In the platform calculator we have a signal pool of momentary up to 25 possible live signals. The first 10 signals in this pool are fix assigned the rest of the signals are free assignable. Table 1-2: Live Values Pool

Number Assignment Assignment type Signal 1 Result 1 Fixed Signal 2 Result 2 Fixed Signal 3 Result 3 Fixed Signal 4 Result 4 Fixed Signal 5 Reserved Fixed Signal 6 Reserved Fixed Signal 7 Reserved Fixed Signal 8 Reserved Fixed Signal 9 Reserved Fixed Signal 10 Reserved Fixed Signal 11 MLT 1/CH1 Concentration Programmable Signal 12 HFID Concentration Programmable Signal 13 MLT 2/CH3 Temperature Programmable Signal 14 HFID Temperature Programmable Signal 15 Not assigned Programmable … … Programmable Signal 25 Not assigned programmable

By using these numbers of the signal pool we determine the live value operands in the calculator’s program. Example of a calculator program with upper signal assignment: Result 1 = (MLT 1/CH1 Concentration) + (HFID Concentration)

Step (o+1) -1 ADD (at beginning the intermediate result IR = 0) Step (o+2) 11 Signal 11 (here: MLT1/CH1 Concentration) Step (o+3) -1 ADD Step (o+4) 12 Signal 12 (here: HFID Concentration) Step (o+5) -14 Store IR to result Step (o+6) 1 Result 1 Step (o+7) -17 End of program

Page 157: Software Version 3.9 - Emerson€¦ · Software Version 3.9.x ... 3- 6 3.8.1 Control module manufacturing data ... This also includes a self-test of the analyzer(s) or analyzer module(s)

Calculator on Control Module Level

HAS64E-IM-SW39(1) [HFID Software 3.9.x] CM Calculator Page 5

1.3 Constant values The same principle is used for the constant values. We have a pool of free assignable constant values. Example of a constant signal pool:

Number Assignment Constant -1 1.000000 Constant-2 10.00000 Constant-3 100.0000 Constant-4 1000.000 Constant-5 10000.00 … … Constant-21 500.0000

By using the numbers of the signal pool we determine again the constant operands in the calculator’s program.

Example of a calculator program with upper live signal and constant assignment:

Result1 = (MLT 1/CH1-Concentration) + 100

Step (o+1) -1 ADD (addition by using the live operand’s class) Step (o+2) 11 Live value number 11 (here: MLT1/CH1-Concentration) Step (o+3) -5 ADDC (addition by using the constant operand’s class) Step (o+4) 3 Constant number 3 (here: 100.0) Step (o+5) -14 Store IR to result Step (o+6) 1 Result 1 Step (o+7) -17 End of program

1.4 Memory values The same principle as in constant values is used again for the memory values. We have a pool of usable memory places where intermediate calculation results can be stored to.

Page 158: Software Version 3.9 - Emerson€¦ · Software Version 3.9.x ... 3- 6 3.8.1 Control module manufacturing data ... This also includes a self-test of the analyzer(s) or analyzer module(s)

Calculator on Control Module Level

HAS64E-IM-SW39(1) [HFID Software 3.9.x] CM Calculator Page 6

1.5 Menu tree for the system calculator The following pictures show the menu tree and the LON variables which are assigned to the single menu lines. System configuration and diagnostics… System calculator… Picture 1-1: System Calculator Menu With the ’Calculator is’ parameter we show whether the system calculator functionality is • Disabled • Enabled • Has a Program Error (after trying to enable) In the case of a program error by the ‘Program error in step:’ parameter is displayed in what step of the program this error happened. If there is no error this parameter equals ‘0’.

- System calculator –

Programming… Signals… Units… Scaling… Calculator is: Enabled Program error in step: 0 Result -1: 0.1234 Result -2: 1234.5 Result -3: 123.45 Result -4: 98.765

CALCSTATUS CLCERRLINE CALC1RESULT CALC2RESULT CALC3RESULT CALC4RESULT

Page 159: Software Version 3.9 - Emerson€¦ · Software Version 3.9.x ... 3- 6 3.8.1 Control module manufacturing data ... This also includes a self-test of the analyzer(s) or analyzer module(s)

Calculator on Control Module Level

HAS64E-IM-SW39(1) [HFID Software 3.9.x] CM Calculator Page 7

1.5.1 Submenu ‘Signals’ The live values ‘signal assignment is done in the submenu ‘Signals…”. System configuration and diagnostics… System calculator… Signals…

Picture 1-2: Signal Assignment of System Calculator The single signals of the pool (selected by ‘Signal number’) are assigned by first selecting the source analyzer module (AM) respectively analyzer channel of the requested signal and then the signal name itself. Please, note that is only possible to modify the programmable type of signal numbers. To realize the signal name’s selection there is used an already implemented feature of the AM’s. It has being used for the small bar graphs display and for the analog outputs of the SIO module. It is the SVCONT/SVNAME variable mechanism. This mechanism provides the possibility to have a link to the LON variables of an AM which are listed in the SVCONT enumeration. In the SVNAME variable are listed the related human readable strings. If we want to assign the signals not via the menu but via LON variable access we have to do the following steps: 1. Enter the signal number by setting CALCSIGNUMC. 2. Enter the source of the signal by setting CALCSRCC to the TAG-variable’s string of the requested

channel. 3. Set CALC_ENTRYSIG (instead of using CALCSIGC) to the enumerated value that the signal has in the

SVCONT-variable.

- Signals –

Signal number: 11 Choose signal source module… Choose signal…

CALCSIGNUMC CALCSRCSEL_ CALCSIGSEL_

Signal name: Concentration Signal comes from: MLT/CH1 Current signal value: 123.45 ppm

View…

CALCSIGC CALCSRCC CALCVALC fct3: CASIGLST_

Page 160: Software Version 3.9 - Emerson€¦ · Software Version 3.9.x ... 3- 6 3.8.1 Control module manufacturing data ... This also includes a self-test of the analyzer(s) or analyzer module(s)

Calculator on Control Module Level

HAS64E-IM-SW39(1) [HFID Software 3.9.x] CM Calculator Page 8

It is possible to show a listing of the whole signal pool with the entered programmable as well as the fixed assignments. Picture 1-3: Listing of Signal Assignment

- Signal List –

List Offset (o): 10 Signal (o+1): Concentration: MLT/CH1 Signal (o+2): Concentration: MLT/CH2 Signal (o+3): Concentration: MLT/CH3 Signal (o+4): Concentration: FID Signal (o+5): Temperature: MLT/CH1 Signal (o+6): Temperature: MLT/CH2 Signal (o+7): Pressure: MLT/CH1 Signal (o+8): Flow: MLT/CH3 Signal (o+9): ????: ???? Signal (o+10): ????: ????

<< Back… >>

LISTOFFSET MENU1LINE MENU2LINE MENU3LINE MENU4LINE MENU5LINE MENU6LINE MENU7LINE MENU8LINE MENU9LINE MENU10LINE fct3: BACKVARS fct4: ESCAPE fct5: LOADVARS

Page 161: Software Version 3.9 - Emerson€¦ · Software Version 3.9.x ... 3- 6 3.8.1 Control module manufacturing data ... This also includes a self-test of the analyzer(s) or analyzer module(s)

Calculator on Control Module Level

HAS64E-IM-SW39(1) [HFID Software 3.9.x] CM Calculator Page 9

1.5.2 Submenu ‘Programming’ The constant values are configured in the submenu ‘Programming…’. System configuration and diagnostics… System calculator… Programming… Picture 1-4: Constant Values Assignment System configuration and diagnostics… System calculator… Programming… More…

- Constants (1/3)–

Constant -1: 1.000000 Constant -2: 10.00000 Constant -3: 100.0000 Constant -4: 1000.000 Constant -5: 10000.00 Constant -6: 100000.0 Constant -7: 1000000 Programming… More…

CALCAC1 CALCAC2 CALCAC3 CALCAC4 CALCAC5 CALCAC6 CALCAC7 CALCPRG_ fct5: CALCCONS2

- Constants (2/3)–

Constant -8: 0.100000 Constant -9: 0.010000 Constant -10: 0.001000 Constant -11: 0.000100 Constant -12: 0.000010 Constant -13: 0.000001 Constant -14: 0.200000 More…

CALCBC1 CALCBC2 CALCBC3 CALCBC4 CALCBC5 CALCBC6 CALCBC7 fct5: CALCCONS3

Page 162: Software Version 3.9 - Emerson€¦ · Software Version 3.9.x ... 3- 6 3.8.1 Control module manufacturing data ... This also includes a self-test of the analyzer(s) or analyzer module(s)

Calculator on Control Module Level

HAS64E-IM-SW39(1) [HFID Software 3.9.x] CM Calculator Page 10

After having done the set-up of the signals we can do the programming of Calculator algorithm itself. It is done in the submenu ‘Programming…’. System configuration and diagnostics… System calculator… Programming… Programming… Picture 1-5: Programming the System Calculator If we want to assign the signals not via the menu but via LON variable access we have to be aware of following: 1. The PLC-programming as well as the programming for the system calculator happens indirectly via the

edit variable-array ED_INTx. To differ what the programming is for there exists the LON variable PROGTYP. Setting PROGTYP = 0 means we want to program the system calculator. Setting PROGTYP = 1 means we want to program the system PLC. 2. By using the variable LISTOFFSET we determine what part of the whole programming list we want to

program. For example, setting LISTOFFSET = 60, means by usage of ED_INT1… ED_INT10 we are able to modify

the program steps 61… 70.

- Programming–

Program offset (o): 0 Step (o+1): -2 Step (o+2): 67 Step (o+3): -4 Step (o+4): -3 Step (o+5): 37 Step (o+6): -8 Step (o+7): 1 Step (o+8): -7 Step (o+9): 0 Step (o+10): 0 << Back… >>

LISTOFFSET ED_INT1 ED_INT2 ED_INT3 ED_INT4 ED_INT5 ED_INT6 ED_INT7 ED_INT8 ED_INT9 ED_INT0 fct3: BACKVARS fct4: ESCAPE fct5: LOADVARS

Page 163: Software Version 3.9 - Emerson€¦ · Software Version 3.9.x ... 3- 6 3.8.1 Control module manufacturing data ... This also includes a self-test of the analyzer(s) or analyzer module(s)

Calculator on Control Module Level

HAS64E-IM-SW39(1) [HFID Software 3.9.x] CM Calculator Page 11

2 Display Calculator Results on Mini-bar graph In order to show the calculator results on the mini-bar graphs of the single component display we overworked the architecture of the bar graph displays. All the signals which are shown on this display in the versions up to now belonged always to the selected component, which means they belonged all to the same AM-channel or to an I/O module which is bound to it. To show a calculator result which belongs to the CM we have to assign signals of a different node/ sub node to the single component display’s bar graphs. Therefore we have chosen a way which enables us to do a complete free signal assignment. Also we are able to set-up the calculator’s result’s unit and its range limits. And finally, we are able to assign an own signal name to the bar graphs. Up to now, there have been shown the name that is noticed in the SVNAME variable. For most of signals this is sufficient. But especially for signals which have no unique function (like calculator results) we want to show configurable and therefore more intuitive signal names. By inventing this new bar graphs display structure we also looked to have a behavior which can fulfill the current functionalities. There we created the possibility to assign signals of I/O modules and their implemented SVCONT/SVNAME signals as well as the ANALOGOUTPUT/ANOPUNITS variable of older I/O module versions. 2.1 Display Mode For each selectable component we can compose bar graph displays. This composition can show signals of a prepared pool from any attached network node. To have the possibility of being compatible to current software versions we create also a mode which displays the signals as they are selected by the analyzers itself. System configuration and diagnostics… Measurement display setup… Picture 1-5: Programming the System Calculator

Picture 2-1: Measurement Display Set-up

In upper menu we first select the component we want to do the assignment for (“Choose component module…”).

- Measurement display set-up (1/2)–

Choose component module… Selected component module: MLT/CH1 Display mode for line 1: Disabled Display mode for line 2: AnalyzerSelected Display mode for line 3: PlatformSelected Display mode for line 4: PlatformSelected Signal number for line 1: 1 Signal number for line 2: 1 Signal number for line 3: 2 Signal number for line 4: 4

Signals__

LINSRCSEL_ LINESRCMODC LINEDISPC1 LINEDISPC2 LINEDISPC3 LINEDISPC4 LINESIGNC1 LINESIGNC2 LINESIGNC3 LINESIGNC4

Page 164: Software Version 3.9 - Emerson€¦ · Software Version 3.9.x ... 3- 6 3.8.1 Control module manufacturing data ... This also includes a self-test of the analyzer(s) or analyzer module(s)

Calculator on Control Module Level

HAS64E-IM-SW39(1) [HFID Software 3.9.x] CM Calculator Page 12

By use of the four “Display mode for line x”- parameters we select the handling of the 4 bar graphs. Disabled: The bar graph is switched off. AnalyzerSelected: The bar graph receives the signal from the SVNAMEx-variable of the selected component module (AM). This is the already implemented and mainly used mode. PlatformSelected: The bar graph receives its signal from a signal pool that is installed in the Control Module itself. 2.2 Assign signals and convenient names If we use the “PlatformSelected” signal mode we have to determine what signal number of the pool has to be displayed. The selection of this number is performed in the appropriate menu line “Signal number for line x”. Now we have to determine only what kind of signal is behind each signal number of the pool. This is done in the following menu display. System configuration and diagnostics… Measurement display set-up… Signals…

Picture 2-2: Platform selected Signal Assignment

We are able to assign signals which come from all installed nodes/ subnodes and have the SVCONT/SVNAME variable. Furthermore we present I/O modules which have the ANALOGOUTPUT/ ANOPUNITS variable. The procedure is the following: First we select the signal number we want to assign the signal for. Then we choose the source (node/subnode) the signal shall come from. After this we choose the signal itself of the selected source. With the “Signal description” parameter, which is an editable string variable, we create the ability to give a convenient signal name to each of the assigned signals. If we want to assign this not via the menu but via LON variable access we have to do the following steps: 1. Enter signal number by setting SGNSNUMC. 2. Enter the source of the signal by setting SGNSRCMODC to TAG variable’s string of the requested

channel. 3. Set SGN_ENTRYSIG (instead of using SGNSRCSIGC) to the enumerated value that the signal has in the

SVCONT variable. 4. Enter the signal description by setting SGNDESCRC.

- Assign mini-bar graph signals –

Signal number: 4 Choose signal source module… Choose signal… Signal description: NOx-Calculation

SGNSNUMC AUXSRCSEL_ AUXSIGSEL_ SGNDESCRC SGNSRCMODC SGNSRCSIGC fct3: AUXLIST_

Signal comes from: Control Module Signal name: Sys.-calculator 1

View…

Page 165: Software Version 3.9 - Emerson€¦ · Software Version 3.9.x ... 3- 6 3.8.1 Control module manufacturing data ... This also includes a self-test of the analyzer(s) or analyzer module(s)

Calculator on Control Module Level

HAS64E-IM-SW39(1) [HFID Software 3.9.x] CM Calculator Page 13

A complete overview of the signals in the pool can be obtained then in the following menu. System configuration and diagnostics… Measurement display set-up… Signals… View…

Picture 2-2: Platform selected Signal Assignment

Picture 2-3: Listing of assigned Signals

- Signal List– Signal offset (o): 0 Signal 1+o: Sys.-calculator 1: Control Module Description: Sum of CO and CO2 Signal 2+o: Sys.-calculator 2: Control Module Description: SysCalc2 Signal 3+o: Sys.-calculator 3: Control Module Description: SysCalc3 Signal 4+o: Sys.-calculator 4: Control Module Description: SysCalc4 Signal 5+o: ????: ???? Description: ???? << Back… >>

LISTOFFSET MENU1LINE MENU2LINE MENU3LINE MENU4LINE MENU5LINE MENU6LINE MENU7LINE MENU8LINE MENU9LINE MENU10LINE fct3: BACKVARS fct4: ESCAPE fct5: LOADVARS

Page 166: Software Version 3.9 - Emerson€¦ · Software Version 3.9.x ... 3- 6 3.8.1 Control module manufacturing data ... This also includes a self-test of the analyzer(s) or analyzer module(s)

Calculator on Control Module Level

HAS64E-IM-SW39(1) [HFID Software 3.9.x] CM Calculator Page 14

3 Assignment to SIO Analog Outputs The assignment of the system calculator results to an analog output of the SIO board is realized by extending the selectable module types. Now it is also possible to select the platform itself with its own signals (calculator results). That means we have added the SVCONT/SVNAME variable for node/subnode 0 (platform). Here we assigned then the new CALCxRESULT variables of the system calculator.

Page 167: Software Version 3.9 - Emerson€¦ · Software Version 3.9.x ... 3- 6 3.8.1 Control module manufacturing data ... This also includes a self-test of the analyzer(s) or analyzer module(s)

Programmable Logic Control (PLC) on Control Module Level

HAS64E-IM-SW39(1) [HFID Software 3.9.x] CM PLC Page 1

Programmable Logic Control (PLC) on Control Module Level

(Platform or MLT, CAT 200 or TFID Analyzer) CONTENTS 1 FUNCTION SURVEY ……………………………………………...……………………………. 3 2 PRINCIPLE OF PROGRAM SET-UP …………………………………………………………. 4 3 OPERATORS ……………………………………………………………………………………. 5 4 INPUT SIGNALS ………………………………………………………………………………… 6 5 OUTPUT SIGNALS ……………………………………………………………………………... 7 6 ACTIONS …………………………………………………………………………………………. 9 7 TIME-CONTROLLED LOGIC ……………………………………………………………….....10

7.1 OFF-DELAY MODE ……………………………………………………………………………. 10 7.2 ON-DELAY MODE …………………………………………………………………………...... 11 7.3 REPEATED PULSE MODE …...………………………………………………………………… 11 7.4 SINGLE PULSE MODE ………………..……………………………………………………….. 12 7.5 RETRIGGERING SINGLE PULSE MODE ………………...…………………………………...... 12 7.6 INHIBITED SINGLE PULSE MODE ………….;…...……………………………………………. 13 7.7 CLOCK TRIGGERED PULSE MODE ………….………………………………………………... 13 7.8 COUNTER MODE …………….………………………………………………………………… 14

8 MENU TREE FOR THE SYSTEM PLC …………………………………………...…………………….. 15

8.1 SUBMENU ‘SIGNALS’ ………..……………………………………………………………….... 16

8.1.1 Input Signals Listing …………………………………………………………………….. 17 8.1.2 Output Signals Listing …………………………………………………………………... 18

8.2 SUBMENU ‘ACTIONS’ ………….………………………………………………………………. 19 8.2.1 Actions Listing …………………………………………………………………………… 20

8.3 SUBMENU ‘TIMERS’ …………………………….……………………………………………... 21 8.4 SUBMENU ‘PROGRAMMING’ …………………………………………………………………... 23 8.5 SUBMENU ‘RESULTS’ ……………...………………………………………………………….. 24

9 APPLICATIONS …………………………………………………………………………………. 25

9.1 STREAM CONTROL WITH AN ACTIVE SYSTEM CALIBRATION ……………………………...... 25 9.2 REMOTE VALVE SWITCHING WITH AN ACTIVE SYSTEM CALIBRATION ……………………... 27

Page 168: Software Version 3.9 - Emerson€¦ · Software Version 3.9.x ... 3- 6 3.8.1 Control module manufacturing data ... This also includes a self-test of the analyzer(s) or analyzer module(s)

Programmable Logic Control (PLC) on Control Module Level

HAS64E-IM-SW39(1) [HFID Software 3.9.x] CM PLC Page 2

Listing of used Pictures PICTURE 1-1: BLOCK DIAGRAM OF THE SYSTEM PLC ………………………………………………………. 3 PICTURE 7-1: THE TIMER FUNCTION BLOCK ………………………………………………………………….. 10 PICTURE 7-2: OFF-DELAY TIMER MODE DIAGRAM ………………………………………………………....... 10 PICTURE 7-3: ON-DELAY TIMER MODE DIAGRAM ………………………………………………………........ 11 PICTURE 7-4: REPEATED PULSE TIMER MODE DIAGRAM …………………………………………………... 11 PICTURE 7-5: SINGLE PULSE TIMER MODE DIAGRAM ………………………………………………………. 12 PICTURE 7-6: RETRIGGERING SINGLE PULSE TIMER MODE DIAGRAM ……………………………..... 12 PICTURE 7-7: INHIBITED SINGLE PULSE TIMER MODE DIAGRAM ……………………………………... 13 PICTURE 7-8: CLOCK TRIGGERED PULSE TIMER MODE DIAGRAM…………………………………….. 13 PICTURE 7-9: COUNTER MODE DIAGRAM ………………………………………………………………. 14 PICTURE 8-1: SYSTEM PLC MENU ……………………………………………………………………… 15 PICTURE 8-2: INPUT SIGNAL ASSIGNMENT OF SYSTEM PLC ………………………………………… 16 PICTURE 8-5: ACTIONS ASSIGNMENT OF SYSTEM PLC ……………………………………………….. 19 PICTURE 8-6: LISTING OF ACTIONS ASSIGNMENT ……………………………………………………… 20 PICTURE 8-7: TIMERS SETUP OF SYSTEM PLC ………………………………………………………. 21 PICTURE 8-8: LISTING OF TIMERS’ CONFIGURATION ………………………………………………….. 22 PICTURE 8-9: DISPLAY OF TIMERS’ STATES ………………………………………………………….. 22 PICTURE 8-10: PROGRAMMING OF SYSTEM PLC ………………………………………………………...23 PICTURE 8-11: DISPLAY OF THE SYSTEM PLC RESULTS ………………………………………………. 24 Listing of used Tables TABLE 3-1: THE OPERATORS OF THE SYSTEM PLC …………………………………………………….. 5 TABLE 4-1: EXAMPLE OF AN INPUT SIGNALS POOL ……………………………………………………... 6 TABLE 5-1: OUTPUT OF SIGNALS POOL ………………………………………………………………….. 7 TABLE 5-2: EXAMPLE OF A PLC PROGRAM USING INPUT AND OUTPUT SIGNALS ……………………... 8 TABLE 5-3: EXAMPLE OF A SR-FLIP-FLOP AS PLC PROGRAM …….………………………………….... 8 TABLE 6-1: EXAMPLE OF AN ACTIONS POOL ……………………………………………………………... 9 TABLE 6-2: EXAMPLE OF A PLC PROGRAM USING ACTIONS ……………………………………………. 9 TABLE 8-1: DIFFERENT TIMER MODES AND THE RELATED MEANING OF THE OTHER PARAMETERS….. 21

Page 169: Software Version 3.9 - Emerson€¦ · Software Version 3.9.x ... 3- 6 3.8.1 Control module manufacturing data ... This also includes a self-test of the analyzer(s) or analyzer module(s)

Programmable Logic Control (PLC) on Control Module Level

HAS64E-IM-SW39(1) [HFID Software 3.9.x] CM PLC Page 3

1 Function Survey Picture 1-1: Block diagram of the System PLC

STCONT/ STNAME Signals of all LON sub nodes

Input

Signals

PLC- Timer

System Clock

Output Signals

editable Program

usable Operators

PLC Computing

Actions

PLC Results

PLC Memories

PLC Results

for external usage

STINAME/ AM_INPUT actions of all LON sub nodes

usage for - DIO Outputs - SIO Relays - Bargraphs - System Calculator

Timer Outputs

Timer Inputs

System Pumps

DIO Inputs

Page 170: Software Version 3.9 - Emerson€¦ · Software Version 3.9.x ... 3- 6 3.8.1 Control module manufacturing data ... This also includes a self-test of the analyzer(s) or analyzer module(s)

Programmable Logic Control (PLC) on Control Module Level

HAS64E-IM-SW39(1) [HFID Software 3.9.x] CM PLC Page 4

2 Principle of Program Setup As it would be a too high effort to realize a comfortable mathematical formula system we created a syntax which is easy to input and easy to realize. As we assume that customers or service people have to setup the program only one time for an installed system it should be acceptable to realize a form which is only done by inputting numbers. Therefore we have mainly to differ between positive and negative numbers. The program operations are assigned with negative numbers. The operands which are used by these input operations are positive numbers. These positive numbers symbolize signals which are part of a signal pool. Also we have to know that there are used different classes of operands. That means we have different classes of signal pools. Those are: • Input signals • Output signals • Actions. In each of these classes exists an own numbering and we determine by the operator itself which class of these operands is meant. Remark: Opposite to former versions allowing PLC function within ONE MLT analyzer module (AM) or for ONE MLT analyzer (or CAT200/ TFID analyzer) ONLY now the system PLC is based on the Control Module level (CM). This allows including ALL analyzer modules and MLT channels of a NGA 2000 analyzer system into the PLC system such as CLD’s and HFID’s. The results of the system PLC can be put onto the programmable Input/ Output Modules SIO or DIO. The SIO or DIO’s can work as Control Module I/O’s being then located in a platform or in a MLT, CAT 200 or TFID Analyzer but also as local I/O’s in (remote) MLT, CAT 200 or TFID analyzer module.

Page 171: Software Version 3.9 - Emerson€¦ · Software Version 3.9.x ... 3- 6 3.8.1 Control module manufacturing data ... This also includes a self-test of the analyzer(s) or analyzer module(s)

Programmable Logic Control (PLC) on Control Module Level

HAS64E-IM-SW39(1) [HFID Software 3.9.x] CM PLC Page 5

3 Operators In the following table we find all the currently available operators (negative numbers) and their meaning. Hereby is used the acronym “IR” for the actually calculated intermediate result of the PLC program. Table 3-1: The Operators of the System PLC Operator Number

Acronym Description

-1 NOP No operation (placeholder) -2 OR OR combine the input signals with following ID; store to IR -3 AND AND combine the input signals with following ID; store to IR -4 INVERT Invert the IR -5 STORE Set/ clear the output signal with the following ID according IR -6 CLEAR Clear the IR -7 END End of program -8 SET Set the IR -9 LOAD Load IR according input signal with the following ID; -10 IF i1 i2 If IR = True then IR = input signal with the 1st following ID else IR = input signal

with 2nd following ID -11 CALL Actions call according IR by using following ID of actions pool

Page 172: Software Version 3.9 - Emerson€¦ · Software Version 3.9.x ... 3- 6 3.8.1 Control module manufacturing data ... This also includes a self-test of the analyzer(s) or analyzer module(s)

Programmable Logic Control (PLC) on Control Module Level

HAS64E-IM-SW39(1) [HFID Software 3.9.x] CM PLC Page 6

4 Input Signals In the platform PLC we have a signal pool for the input signals. The first part in this pool are fix assigned the rest of the signals are free assignable.

Table 4-1: Example of an Input Signals Pool Signal ID Assignment assignment type

1 PLC Result 1 fixed 2 PLC Result 2 fixed 3 PLC Result 3 fixed … … fixed 15 PLC Result 15 fixed 16 PLC Memory 1 fixed 17 PLC Memory 2 fixed … … fixed 30 PLC Memory 15 fixed 31 PLC Timer1 Out fixed 32 PLC Timer2 Out fixed 33 PLC Timer3 Out fixed 34 PLC Timer4 Out fixed 35 PLC Timer5 Out fixed 36 PLC Timer6 Out fixed 37 PLC Timer7 Out fixed 38 PLC Timer Out fixed 39 reserved fixed 40 reserved fixed 41 System-DIO-Board 1 Input 1 fixed 42 System-DIO-Board 1 Input 2 fixed … … fixed 47 System-DIO-Board 1 Input 7 fixed 48 System-DIO-Board 1 Input 8 fixed 49 System-DIO-Board 2 Input 1 fixed 50 System-DIO-Board 2 Input 2 fixed … … fixed 55 System-DIO-Board 2 Input 7 fixed 56 System-DIO-Board 2 Input 8 fixed 57 System-Pump 1 fixed 58 System-Pump 2 fixed … … fixed 62 reserved fixed 63 On-Signal fixed 64 Off-Signal fixed 65 MLT1/CH1-Failure programmable 66 MLT1/CH1-Conc.Low-Low programmable 67 MLT1/CH3-Flow Low programmable 68 FID-Cal. in progress programmable 69 CLD-Maintenance request programmable 70 Control Module-SYS: Valve1 programmable 71 Control Module-SYS: Valve2 programmable 72 Control Module-SYS: Valve3 programmable … … programmable

127 not assigned programmable 128 not assigned programmable

Page 173: Software Version 3.9 - Emerson€¦ · Software Version 3.9.x ... 3- 6 3.8.1 Control module manufacturing data ... This also includes a self-test of the analyzer(s) or analyzer module(s)

Programmable Logic Control (PLC) on Control Module Level

HAS64E-IM-SW39(1) [HFID Software 3.9.x] CM PLC Page 7

5 Output Signals The same principle as for input signals is used for the output signals. We have a pool of usable buffer places where intermediate calculation results can be stored to. The content of these buffers may be used for further processing. Table 5-1: Output Signals Pool

Signal ID

Assignment Tip

1 Result 1 full usable LON variable (PLCRESULT1) 2 Result 2 full usable LON variable (PLCRESULT2) 3 Result 3 full usable LON variable (PLCRESULT3) … … full usable LON variable … … full usable LON variable 14 Result 14 full usable LON variable (PLCRESULT14) 15 Result 15 full usable LON variable (PLCRESULT15) 16 Memory 1 intermediate storage 17 Memory 2 intermediate storage … … intermediate storage … … intermediate storage 29 Memory 14 intermediate storage 30 Memory 15 intermediate storage 31 Timer 1 Input1 usage depends on timer mode 32 Timer 2 Input1 usage depends on timer mode 33 Timer 3 Input1 usage depends on timer mode 34 Timer 4 Input1 usage depends on timer mode 35 Timer 5 Input1 usage depends on timer mode 36 Timer 6 Input1 usage depends on timer mode 37 Timer 7 Input1 usage depends on timer mode 38 Timer 8 Input1 usage depends on timer mode 39 reserved 40 reserved 41 Timer 1 Inout2 usage depends on timer mode 42 Timer 2 Input2 usage depends on timer mode 43 Timer 3 Input2 usage depends on timer mode 44 Timer 4 Input2 usage depends on timer mode 45 Timer 5 Input2 usage depends on timer mode 46 Timer 6 Input2 usage depends on timer mode 47 Timer 7 Input2 usage depends on timer mode 48 Timer 8 Input2 usage depends on timer mode 49 reserved 50 reserved … … 56 reserved 57 System-Pump 1 full usable LON variable (SYSPUMP1) 58 System-Pump 2 full usable LON variable (SYSPUMP2) 59 reserved … … 69 reserved 70 reserved

Page 174: Software Version 3.9 - Emerson€¦ · Software Version 3.9.x ... 3- 6 3.8.1 Control module manufacturing data ... This also includes a self-test of the analyzer(s) or analyzer module(s)

Programmable Logic Control (PLC) on Control Module Level

HAS64E-IM-SW39(1) [HFID Software 3.9.x] CM PLC Page 8

In the output signal pool the Results1… 15 are assigned as full usable LON variable-array. They are also implemented in the STCONT/STNAME-feature. So the PLC Results can be linked to digital outputs of DIO or to the relays of SIO. They are also implemented in the SVCONT/SVNAME-feature. So we are able to link them to analog outputs of SIO, the bargraphs display and to the system calculator signals. By using the signal IDs of the signal pools we determine the input respectively the output signal operands in the PLC’s program. Following are examples that use the signal assignment of “Table 4-1: Example of an Input Signals Pool”.

Result1 = (MLT1/CH1-Failure) OR (MLT/CH1-Conc.Low-Low) OR (DIO1-Input5)

Table 5-2: Example of a PLC program using input and output signals

Step (o+1) -2 OR (at beginning the intermediate result IR = 0) Step (o+2) 65 Input-Signal 65 (here: MLT1/CH1-Failure) Step (o+3) 66 Input-Signal 66 (here: MLT/CH1-Conc.Low-Low) Step (o+4) 45 Input-Signal 45 (System-DIO-Board 1 Input 5) Step (o+5) -5 Store IR to output buffer Step (o+6) 1 Output-Signal 1 (PLC Result 1) Step (o+7) -7 end of program

SR-Flip-Flop

Set (DIO1-Input5)

Reset (DIO1-Input6)

Out (Result5)

0 0 last Out 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 1

Table 5-3: Example of a SR-Flip-Flop as PLC program

Step (o+1) -9 LOAD Step (o+2) 46 IR = 'Reset' ->Input-Signal 46 (System-DIO-Board 1 Inout 6) Step (o+3) -10 IF (Reset = 1) Step (o+4) 64 then IR = 0 Step (o+5) 5 else IR = last Out (PLC Result 5) Step (o+6) -5 STORE Step (o+7) 30 to Memory15 Step (o+8) -9 LOAD Step (o+9) 45 IR = 'Set' ->Input-Signal 45 (System-DIO-Board 1 Input 5) Step (o+10) -10 IF (Set = 1) Step (o+11) 63 then IR = 1 Step (o+12) 30 else Memory15Step (o+13) -5 STORE Step (o+14) 5 to Out (PLC Result 5) Step (o+15) -7 End of program

Page 175: Software Version 3.9 - Emerson€¦ · Software Version 3.9.x ... 3- 6 3.8.1 Control module manufacturing data ... This also includes a self-test of the analyzer(s) or analyzer module(s)

Programmable Logic Control (PLC) on Control Module Level

HAS64E-IM-SW39(1) [HFID Software 3.9.x] CM PLC Page 9

6 Actions The same principle as for input and output is used again for the actions. We have a pool where available actions of the different modules can be assigned to. By using the action IDs of this pool the single actions can be called according to the intermediate result which is calculated in the PLC program. Table 6-1: Example of an Action Pool

Action ID

Assignment assignment type

1 MLT1/CH1-AM:Zero-Cal programmable 2 MLT1/CH1-HoldAnalogOutput programmable 3 MLT1/CH3-ExtStatus1 programmable 4 MLT1/CH2-External failure programmable 5 Control Module-SYS:Zero-Cal programmable 6 Control Module-SYS:Cancel-Cal programmable 7 not assigned programmable 8 not assigned programmable … programmable … programmable

19 not assigned programmable 20 not assigned programmable

Following is an example that uses the signal assignment of “Table 4-1: Example of an Input Signals Pool” and of “Table 6-1: Example of an Actions Pool” MLT1/CH1-AM: Zero-Cal = (MLT1/CH3-Flow Low) AND (DIO1-Input5) This means: Start zero calibration of MLT1/CH1 if flow lf MLT1/CH3 is not too low and digital input 5 of DIO-Board 1 goes high. Table 6-2: Example of a PLC program using actions

Step (o+1) -2 OR (at beginning the intermediate result IR = 0) Step (o+2) 67 Input-Signal 67 (here: MLT1/CH3-Flow Low) Step (o+3) -4 invert the IR (build "/(MLT1/CH3-Flow Low)") Step (o+4) -3 AND (current IR with following input signals) Step (o+5) 37 Input-Signal 37 (System-DIO-Board 1 Input 5) Step (o+5) -8 perform action Step (o+6) 1 Action-ID 1 (here: MLT1/CH1-AM:Zero-Cal) Step (o+7) -7 End of program

Page 176: Software Version 3.9 - Emerson€¦ · Software Version 3.9.x ... 3- 6 3.8.1 Control module manufacturing data ... This also includes a self-test of the analyzer(s) or analyzer module(s)

Programmable Logic Control (PLC) on Control Module Level

HAS64E-IM-SW39(1) [HFID Software 3.9.x] CM PLC Page 10

7 Time controlled Logic In order to do time dependent logic controls it is necessary to use timers. These timers enables us to have:

• switch-off delays • switch-on delays • configurable pulse width square waves • date and time controlled start of timer functions

To achieve all these variety of features the timers are implemented in different running modes. To control the timers by other PLC signals the timers are provided with 2 digital inputs. The function of the digital inputs depends on the elected timer mode. The output of the timer function block is used by the PLC again for further processing. Picture 7-1: The Timer Function Block 7.1 Off-Delay Mode The following picture shows the timed response of the ‘Off-delay’ timer mode. Picture 7.2: Off-Delay Timer Mode Diagram When ‘Input1’ of the timer is True, ‘Output’ is set True and the elapsed time counter is set to zero. When’Input1’ is False for longer than the ‘time duration’, ‘Output’ is set False. That means it is the specified time duration that must elapse before the False output value is applied. ‘Input2’ of the timer is not used in this mode.

Input 1

Input 2

Outputinternal timer parameter

Input1

time durationOutput

Page 177: Software Version 3.9 - Emerson€¦ · Software Version 3.9.x ... 3- 6 3.8.1 Control module manufacturing data ... This also includes a self-test of the analyzer(s) or analyzer module(s)

Programmable Logic Control (PLC) on Control Module Level

HAS64E-IM-SW39(1) [HFID Software 3.9.x] CM PLC Page 11

7.2 On-Delay Mode The following picture shows the timed response of the ‘On-delay’ timer mode. Picture 7-3: On-delay Timer Mode Diagram When ‘Input1’ of the timer is False, ‘Output’ is set False and the elapsed time counter is set to zero. When ‘Input1’ is True for longer than the ‘time duration’, ‘Output’ is set True. That means it is specified the time duration that must elapse before the True output value is applied. ‘Input2’ of the timer is not used in this mode. 7.3 Repeated Pulse Mode The following picture shows the timed behavior of the ‘Repeated-Pulse’ timer mode. Picture 7-4: Repeated-Pulse Timer Mode Diagram

When ‘Input1’ of the timer is False, ‘Output’ is set False. When ‘Input1’ is True, the ‘Output’ is set according to a square wave. On the rising edge of ‘Input1’ it begins with setting the ‘Output’ True until the high duration time is elapsed. Then ‘Output’ is set False and remains False for the rest of the period time. Then ‘Output’ is set True again for the high duration time, and so forth. This procedure goes on endless until Input1 is set False. ‘Input2’ of the timer is not used in this mode.

Input1

time durationOutput

Input1

Output high duration

period time

Page 178: Software Version 3.9 - Emerson€¦ · Software Version 3.9.x ... 3- 6 3.8.1 Control module manufacturing data ... This also includes a self-test of the analyzer(s) or analyzer module(s)

Programmable Logic Control (PLC) on Control Module Level

HAS64E-IM-SW39(1) [HFID Software 3.9.x] CM PLC Page 12

7.4 Single Pulse Mode The following picture shows the timed behavior of the ‘Single Pulse’ timer mode. Picture 7-5: Single Pulse Timer Mode Diagram When ‘Input1’ of the timer changes from False to True (rising edge trigger) during ‘Output’ is False, ‘Output’ is set True until time duration is elapsed. Then ‘Output’ is set False. ‘Input2’ of the timer is not used in this mode. Tips: The pulse width on Input1 is not relevant, the duration of the pulse on ‘Output’ is always the same. The level changes on Input1 are scanned on a configurable rate. Therefore the time between edges (rising and falling) has to be at minimum of this set update rate. 7.5 Retriggering Single Pulse Mode The following picture shows the timed behavior of the ‘Retriggering Single Pulse’ timer mode. Picture 7-6: Retriggering Single Pulse Timer Mode Diagram

When ‘Input1’ of the timer changes from False to True (rising edge trigger), ‘Output’ is set True until time duration is elapsed. Then ‘Output’ is set False. When ‘Input1’ changes from False to True again during Output is still set True the elapsing of the duration starts new. ‘Input2’ of the timer is not used in this mode. Tips: The pulse width on Input1 is not relevant, the duration of the pulse on ‘Output’ is only stretched if there is a rising edge on Input1 again. The level changes on Input1 are scanned on a configurable rate. Therefore the time between edges (rising and falling) has to be at minimum of this set update rate.

time durationtime duration

Input1

Output

time duration 2

time duration 1time duration

Input1

Output

retrigger

Page 179: Software Version 3.9 - Emerson€¦ · Software Version 3.9.x ... 3- 6 3.8.1 Control module manufacturing data ... This also includes a self-test of the analyzer(s) or analyzer module(s)

Programmable Logic Control (PLC) on Control Module Level

HAS64E-IM-SW39(1) [HFID Software 3.9.x] CM PLC Page 13

7.6 Inhibited Single Pulse Mode The following picture shows the timed behavior of the ‘Inhibited Single Pulse’ timer mode. Picture 7-7: Inhibited Single Pulse Timer Mode Diagram

When ‘Input1’ (logical trigger) of the timer transitions from False to True (rising edge trigger), ‘Output’ is set True until time duration is elapsed. Then ‘Output’ is set False. When ‘Input2’ (logical inhibit) of the timer is set during ‘Output’ is True (elapsing duration) the time stops and retain its value until Input2 transitions to False again. i.e., the duration is increased by the inhibit pulses duration. Tips: The duration of the pulse on ‘Output’ does not depend on the pulse width of Input1. The level changes on Input1 are scanned on a configurable rate. Therefore the time between edges (rising and falling) has to be at minimum of this set update rate. 7.7 Clock Triggered Pulse Mode In the clock triggered pulse mode the behavior of the output is similar as in ‘single pulse mode.’ But the pulse is not triggered by Input1 but at a certain date/ time. Picture 7-8: Clock Triggered Pulse Timer Mode Diagram

When the real time clock of the device reaches a set date/ time (time trigger), ‘Output’ is set True until time duration is elapsed. Then ‘Output’ is set False. This procedure recurs after a set interval time. ‘Input1’ and ‘Input2’ of the timer are not used in this mode.

Input1 (Trigger)

Input2 (Inhibit)

Output

Inhibit pulse

time duration time duration

time durationtime duration

interval time DateDate Time Time

Output

Page 180: Software Version 3.9 - Emerson€¦ · Software Version 3.9.x ... 3- 6 3.8.1 Control module manufacturing data ... This also includes a self-test of the analyzer(s) or analyzer module(s)

Programmable Logic Control (PLC) on Control Module Level

HAS64E-IM-SW39(1) [HFID Software 3.9.x] CM PLC Page 14

7.7 Counter Mode The following picture shows the timed behavior of the ‘Counter’ mode. Picture 7-9: Counter Mode Diagram When ‘Input2’ (logical ‘Reset’) of the timer is set to True, ‘Output’ is set False and the internal decrement counter is set to its preset value. After Input2 is set False the rising edges on Input1 (logical ‘Trigger’) decrement the counter. When the counter is less than or equal to zero, ‘Output’ is set True and the counter holds its value. Tips: The level changes on Input1 are scanned on a configurable rate. Therefore the time between edges (rising and falling) has to be at minimum of this set update rate.

Preset

Input2 (Reset)

Input1 (Trigger)

internal count

Output

(here: 3)

2

1

0

Page 181: Software Version 3.9 - Emerson€¦ · Software Version 3.9.x ... 3- 6 3.8.1 Control module manufacturing data ... This also includes a self-test of the analyzer(s) or analyzer module(s)

Programmable Logic Control (PLC) on Control Module Level

HAS64E-IM-SW39(1) [HFID Software 3.9.x] CM PLC Page 15

8 Menu Tree for the System PLC The following pictures show the menu tree and the LON variables which are assigned to the single menu lines. Picture 8-1: System PLC Menu With the ‘PLC is’ parameter we disable or enable PLC function. Also, with enabling the PLC there is the choice with which cyclic rate the programmed algorithm is called.

• Disabled • has a Program Error (after trying to enable) • Cycle 0.1 s • Cycle 0.2 s • Cycle 0.5 s • Cycle 1 s

In the case of a program error by the ‘Program error in step:’ parameter is displayed in what step of the program this error happened. If there is no error, this parameter equals to ‘0’.

System configuration and diagnostics…

System PLC…

-System Programmable Logic Control (PLC) –

Programming............................................................... Signals… Timer… Results… PLC is: Cycle: 1 s

Program error in step: 0 Measure Back…

fct:PLCPROG_ PLCSTATUS PLCERRLINE

Page 182: Software Version 3.9 - Emerson€¦ · Software Version 3.9.x ... 3- 6 3.8.1 Control module manufacturing data ... This also includes a self-test of the analyzer(s) or analyzer module(s)

Programmable Logic Control (PLC) on Control Module Level

HAS64E-IM-SW39(1) [HFID Software 3.9.x] CM PLC Page 16

8.1 Submenu ‘Signals’ All programmable signal assignments are done in the submenu ‘Signals…’. Picture 8-2: Input Signal Assignment of System PLC The single signals of the pool (selected by ‘Signal number’) are assigned by first selecting the source analyzer module (AM) resp. analyzer channel of the requested signal and then the signal name itself. Please note that it is only possible to modify the programmable type of signal numbers. For the signal name’s selection there is used an already implemented feature of the AM’s. It has been used for the digital outputs of the DIO resp. the SIO module. It is the STCONT/STNAME variable mechanism. This mechanism provides the possibility to have a link to the LON variables of an AM which are listed in the STCONT enum. In the STNAME variable are listed the related human readable strings. If we want to assign the signals not via the menu but via LON variable access we have to do the following steps: 1. Enter signal number by setting PLCSIGNUMC. 2. Enter the source of the signal by setting PLCSRCC to the TAG-variable’s string of the requested channel. 3. Set PLC_ENTRYSIG (instead of using PLCSIGC) to the enum variable that the signal has in the STCONT-variable.

System configuration and diagnostics…

System PLC…

Signals…

-Signals –

Actions… - Input Signals - Signal number: 65Choose signal source module… Choose signal…

Signal name: Failure Signal comes from: MLT/CH1 Current signal level: Off Measure View… Back… Outputs

PLCSIGNUMC (65…128) PLCSRCSEL_ PLCSIGSEL_

PLCSIGC PLCSRCC PLCLEVELC fct3: PLCSIGLST_ fct5: PLCOUTLST_

Page 183: Software Version 3.9 - Emerson€¦ · Software Version 3.9.x ... 3- 6 3.8.1 Control module manufacturing data ... This also includes a self-test of the analyzer(s) or analyzer module(s)

Programmable Logic Control (PLC) on Control Module Level

HAS64E-IM-SW39(1) [HFID Software 3.9.x] CM PLC Page 17

8.1.1 Input Signals Listing Via the View function key it is possible to show a listing of the whole input signal pool with the entered programmable as well as the fixed assignments. The name of the fix signal assignments can be listed easily by using the enum variable PLC1INAME/PLC2INAME which contains all the fix assigned signal’s names (currently 64 names). Here is shown a display according “Table 4-1: Example of an Input Signals Pool”. Picture 8-3: Listing of Input Signal Assignment

-- Signal List -- List offset (o): 60 Signal (o+1): PLC-Result1:fix: Off Signal (o+2): PLC-Result2:fix: Off Signal (o+3): PLC-Result3:fix: Off Signal (o+4): PLC-Result4:fix: Off Signal (o+5): PLC-Result5:fix: Off Signal (o+6): PLC-Result6:fix: Off Signal (o+7): PLC-Result7:fix: Off Signal (o+8): PLC-Result8:fix: Off Signal (o+9): PLC-Result9:fix: Off Signal (o+10): PLC-Result10:fix: Off Measure << Back… >>

LISTOFFSET MENU1LINE (live) MENU2LINE (live) MENU3LINE (live) MENU4LINE (live) MENU5LINE (live) MENU6LINE (live) MENU7LINE (live) MENU8LINE (live) MENU9LINE (live) MENU10LINE (live) fct3: BACKVARS fct4: ESCAPE fct5: LOADVARS

Page 184: Software Version 3.9 - Emerson€¦ · Software Version 3.9.x ... 3- 6 3.8.1 Control module manufacturing data ... This also includes a self-test of the analyzer(s) or analyzer module(s)

Programmable Logic Control (PLC) on Control Module Level

HAS64E-IM-SW39(1) [HFID Software 3.9.x] CM PLC Page 18

8.1.2 Output Signals Listing Via the Outputs function key it is possible to show a listing of the whole output signal pool. The name of this fix output signal assignments can be listed easily by using the enum variable PLC1ONAME/PLC2ONAME which contains all the fix assigned signal’s name. Here is shown a display with Output Signals Picture 8-4: Listing of Output Signal Assignment

-- Signal List -- List offset (o): 30 Signal (o+1): PLC-Result 1: Off Signal (o+2): PLC-Result 2: Off Signal (o+3): PLC-Result 3: Off Signal (o+4): PLC-Result 4: Off Signal (o+5): PLC-Result 5: Off Signal (o+6): PLC-Result 6: Off Signal (o+7): PLC-Result 7: Off Signal (o+8): PLC-Result 8: Off Signal (o+9): PLC-Result 9: Off Signal (o+10): PLC-Result 10: Off Measure << Back… >>

LISTOFFSET MENU1LINE (live) MENU2LINE (live) MENU3LINE (live) MENU4LINE (live) MENU5LINE (live) MENU6LINE (live) MENU7LINE (live) MENU8LINE (live) MENU9LINE (live) MENU10LINE (live) fct3: BACKVARS fct4: ESCAPE fct5: LOADVARS

Page 185: Software Version 3.9 - Emerson€¦ · Software Version 3.9.x ... 3- 6 3.8.1 Control module manufacturing data ... This also includes a self-test of the analyzer(s) or analyzer module(s)

Programmable Logic Control (PLC) on Control Module Level

HAS64E-IM-SW39(1) [HFID Software 3.9.x] CM PLC Page 19

8.2 Submenu ‘Actions’ All programmable action assignments are done in the submenu ‘Actions…’. Picture 8-5: Actions Assignment of System PLC The single actions of the pool (selected by ‘Action number’) are assigned by first selecting the source analyzer module (AM) resp. analyzer channel of the requested action and then the function name itself. For the function name’s selection there is used an already implemented feature. It has being used for the digital inputs of the DIO module. It is the STINAME and AM_INPUT/DI_MSGE variable mechanism. This mechanism provides the possibility to have a link to functions of an AM which are listed in the STINAME-enum of the platform or at the AM_INPUT-enum of the single modules. If we want to assign the actions not via the menu by via LON variable access we have to do the following steps: 1. Enter action number by setting PLCACTNUMC. 2. Enter the source of the signal by setting PLCACTSRCC to the TAG-variable’s string of the requested channel. 3. Set PLC_ENTRYACT (instead of using PLCACTIONC) to the corresponding enum value. This value is calculated by usage of STINAME of the platform and AM_INPUT of the selected module. If you select an action which is listed in STINAME, the enum value is just the value of STINAME. If you select an action which is listed in AM_INPUT you have to add the enum value of AM_INPUT to the number of available enum values of STINAME.

System configuration and diagnostics…

System PLC…

Signals…

Actions…

-Actions–

Action Number: 1 Choose module… Choose function…

Function name: AM: Zero-Cal Action goes to: MLT/CH1 Measure View… Back… Outputs

PLCACTNUM [1…20] PLCASRCSEL_ PLCACTSEL_

PLCACTIONC PLCACTSRCC fct3: PLCACTLST_

Page 186: Software Version 3.9 - Emerson€¦ · Software Version 3.9.x ... 3- 6 3.8.1 Control module manufacturing data ... This also includes a self-test of the analyzer(s) or analyzer module(s)

Programmable Logic Control (PLC) on Control Module Level

HAS64E-IM-SW39(1) [HFID Software 3.9.x] CM PLC Page 20

8.2.1 Actions Listing It is possible to show a listing of the whole actions pool with the entered assignments as well as the corresponding signal levels. Picture 8-6: Listing of Actions Assignment

System configuration and diagnostics…

System PLC…

Signals…

Actions…

Views…

-Action List–

List offset (o): 30 Signal (o+1): AM: Zero-Cal: MLT/CH1: Off Signal (o+2): HoldAnalogOutput: MLT/CH1: Off Signal (o+3): ExtStatus: MLT/CH3: Off Signal (o+4): External failure: MLT1/CH2: Off Signal (o+5): SYS:Zero-Cal: Control Module: Off Signal (o+6): SYS:Cancel-Cal:Control Module:Off Signal (o+7): ????: ????: Off Signal (o+8): ????: ????: Off Signal (o+9): ????: ????: Off Signal (o+10): ????: ????: Off Measure << Back… >>

LISTOFFSET MENU1LINE (live) MENU2LINE (live) MENU3LINE (live) MENU4LINE (live) MENU5LINE (live) MENU6LINE (live) MENU7LINE (live) MENU8LINE (live) MENU9LINE (live) MENU10LINE (live fct3: BACKVARS fct4: ESCAPE fct5: LOADVARS

Page 187: Software Version 3.9 - Emerson€¦ · Software Version 3.9.x ... 3- 6 3.8.1 Control module manufacturing data ... This also includes a self-test of the analyzer(s) or analyzer module(s)

Programmable Logic Control (PLC) on Control Module Level

HAS64E-IM-SW39(1) [HFID Software 3.9.x] CM PLC Page 21

8.3 Submenu ‘Timers’ The setup of the timers is configured in the submenu ‘Timers…’ Picture 8-7: Timers Setup of System PLC The single timers are configured by first selecting the timer number itself (currently 1…8). Further configuration parameters depend on the mode the timer has to run in. Therefore the mode has to be elected as next. In following table see the selectable timer modes and the related meaning of the rest of the parameters. Table 8-1: Different Timer Modes and the Related Meaning of the other Parameters Timer mode

Off-delay

On-delay

Repeated-Pulse

Single-Pulse

Retrig-Single-Pulse

Inhib-Single-Pulse

Clock-Trig-Pulse

Counter

Duration delay time

delay time

True pulse width

True pulse width

min. True pulse width

min. True pulse width

True pulse width

-

Period/ Counts

- - period time [seconds]

- - - Interval time [minutes]

Preset count value

Hours Minutes Month Day

- - - - - - date/ time of next triggering the pulse

-

For more information on the different timer modes see also chapter “7 Time controlled Logic.”

System configuration and diagnostics…

System PLC…

Timers… - Timers –

Timer number: 1 Timer mode: Off-delay Duration: 30 sec Period / Counts: 180 sec Hours (0..23): 15 Minutes: 10 Month: 3 Day: 21 Time & Date: 09:37:40 August 21, 2009 Next Start Time: ---

Measure View States… Back…

PLCTMRNUMC [1…8] PLCTMRMODC [see Table 8-1] PLCDURATC [1…3600] PLCTIMC [1…3600] / PLCUC (variable unit) PLCHOURC PLCMINUTC PLCMONTHC PLCDAYC

fct2: PLCTMRLST_ fct3: PLCMRSTAT_ fct4: ESCAPE

Page 188: Software Version 3.9 - Emerson€¦ · Software Version 3.9.x ... 3- 6 3.8.1 Control module manufacturing data ... This also includes a self-test of the analyzer(s) or analyzer module(s)

Programmable Logic Control (PLC) on Control Module Level

HAS64E-IM-SW39(1) [HFID Software 3.9.x] CM PLC Page 22

It is possible to show a listing of the timers’ configuration. Picture 8-8: Listing of Timers’ Configuration It is possible to show the actual states of timers’ inputs and outputs as well as the current counting to perform the different timing functions. Picture 8-9: Display of Timers’ States

System configuration and diagnostics…

System PLC…

Timers…

View…

-Timer Setup–

List Offset (o): 0 Mode/ Duration of timer 1+o: On-delay / 20 s Period / Counts: --- Next Start time: --- Mode/ Duration of timer 2+o: Clock-Trig-Pulse / 20 s Period / Counts: 1440 min Next Start time: 10:30:00 August 21, 2009 Mode/ Duration of timer 3+o: Repeated-Pulse / 2 s Period / Counts: 6 s Next Start time: --- Measure << Back… >>

LISTOFFSET MENU1LINE MENU2LINE MENU3LINE MENU4LINE MENU5LINE MENU6LINE MENU7LINE MENU8LINE MENU9LINE MENU10LINE fct3: BACKVARS fct4: ESCAPE fct5: LOADVARS

-Timer Status– List Offset (o): 0 Timer 1+o (In1/In2/Out): On/Off/Off Count: 3 Timer 2+o (In1/In2/Out): Off/On/On Count: 7 Timer 3+o (In1/In2/Out): Off/Off/Off Count: 3 Timer 4+o (In1/In2/Out): On/On/On Count: 0 Timer 5+o (In1/In2/Out): Off/Off/Off Count: 0 Measure << Back… >>

LISTOFFSET MENU1LINE MENU2LINE MENU3LINE MENU4LINE MENU5LINE MENU6LINE MENU7LINE MENU8LINE MENU9LINE MENU10LINE fct3: BACKVARS fct4: ESCAPE fct5: LOADVARS

System configuration and diagnostics…

System PLC…

Timers…

States…

Page 189: Software Version 3.9 - Emerson€¦ · Software Version 3.9.x ... 3- 6 3.8.1 Control module manufacturing data ... This also includes a self-test of the analyzer(s) or analyzer module(s)

Programmable Logic Control (PLC) on Control Module Level

HAS64E-IM-SW39(1) [HFID Software 3.9.x] CM PLC Page 23

8.4 Submenu ‘Programming’ After having done the setup of the signals and eventually necessary timers we can do the programming of PLC algorithm itself. It is done in the submenu ‘Programming…’ Picture 8-10: Programming the System PLC If we want to assign the signals not by means of the menu but via LON variable access we have to be aware of following: 1. The PLC-programming as well as the programming for the system calculator happens indirectly via the edit variable-array ED_INTx. To differ what the programming is for there exists the LON variable PROGTYP. Setting PROGTYP = 0 means we want to program the system calculator. Setting PROGTYP = 1 means we want to program the system PLC. 2. By using the variable LISTOFFSET we determine what part of the whole programming list we want to program. For example, setting LISTOFFSET = 60, means by usage of ED_INT1… ED_INT10 we are able to modify the program steps 61…70.

-- Programming -- Program Offset (o): 0 Step (o+1): -2 Step (o+2): 67 Step (o+3): -4 Step (o+4): -3 Step (o+5): 37 Step (o+6): -8 Step (o+7): 1 Step (o+8): -7 Step (o+9): 0 Step (o+10): 0 Measure << Back… >>

LISTOFFSET ED_INT1 ED_INT2 ED_INT3 ED_INT4 ED_INT5 ED_INT6 ED_INT7 ED_INT8 ED_INT9 ED_INT10 fct3: BACKVARS fct4: ESCAPE fct5: LOADVARS

System configuration and diagnostics…

System PLC…

Programming…

Page 190: Software Version 3.9 - Emerson€¦ · Software Version 3.9.x ... 3- 6 3.8.1 Control module manufacturing data ... This also includes a self-test of the analyzer(s) or analyzer module(s)

Programmable Logic Control (PLC) on Control Module Level

HAS64E-IM-SW39(1) [HFID Software 3.9.x] CM PLC Page 24

8.5 Submenu ‘Results’ The result of the PLC calculations can be observed in the submenu ‘Results…’ Picture 8-11: Display of the System PLC Results

-- Results (1/2) -- PLC-Output-1: On PLC-Output-2: OffPLC-Output-3: OffPLC-Output-4: OffPLC-Output-5: OffPLC-Output-6: OffPLC-Output-7: OffPLC-Output-8: On PLC-Output-9: OffPLC-Output-10: Off Measure Back… More…

PLCRESULT1 PLCRESULT2 PLCRESULT3 PLCRESULT4 PLCRESULT5 PLCRESULT6 PLCRESULT7 PLCRESULT8 PLCRESULT9 PLCRESULT10 fct4: ESCAPE fct5: PLCRESULTS2

System configuration and diagnostics…

System PLC…

Results…

-- Results (2/2) -- PLC-Output-11: On PLC-Output-12: OffPLC-Output-13: OffPLC-Output-14: OffPLC-Output-15: Off Measure Back…

PLCRESULT11 PLCRESULT12 PLCRESULT13 PLCRESULT14 PLCRESULT15

System configuration and diagnostics…

System PLC…

Results…

More…

Page 191: Software Version 3.9 - Emerson€¦ · Software Version 3.9.x ... 3- 6 3.8.1 Control module manufacturing data ... This also includes a self-test of the analyzer(s) or analyzer module(s)

Programmable Logic Control (PLC) on Control Module Level

HAS64E-IM-SW39(1) [HFID Software 3.9.x] CM PLC Page 25

9 Applications 9.1 Stream Control with an active System Calibration If the system calibration is in the ‘sample gas state’ we do not want to have only one sample gas stream flowing but alternating 3 gas streams. To realize this, we could use 2 timers which give us 3 different signal combinations. These 3 signal combinations are evaluated in that way that for each combination one of the streams is switched on. Timer1-Out Timer2-Out Stream 1 Stream 2 Stream 3 On On On Off Off Off On Off On Off Off Off Off Off On

To vary the switching durations we only have to configure the both timers.

Timer2-Out

Timer1-Out

Sample gas

Samplegas Valve = Sys-Valve1

Timer 1 Repeated-Pulse

Duration = 60 sec Period = 180 sec

in OutTimer 2

Off-Delay Duration = 60 sec

in Out

Sample Gas Timer1-Out Timer2- Out

Stream1 Timer2-Out

Sample gas Timer1-Out & Stream2

Timer2-Out

Sample gas Timer1-Out & Stream3

Timer2-Out

Sample gas Timer1-Out &

Page 192: Software Version 3.9 - Emerson€¦ · Software Version 3.9.x ... 3- 6 3.8.1 Control module manufacturing data ... This also includes a self-test of the analyzer(s) or analyzer module(s)

Programmable Logic Control (PLC) on Control Module Level

HAS64E-IM-SW39(1) [HFID Software 3.9.x] CM PLC Page 26

For the program we presuppose following assignments: Programmable Logic Control (PLC) on Control Module Level Input-ID 65 = Control Module: Sys.-Valve1 PLC-Result 1 = Stream 1 PLC-Result 2 = Stream 2 PLC-Result 3 = Stream 3 Step (1) -9 LOAD Step (2) 65 Control-Module SYS:Valve-1 (= Input-Signal 65) Step (3) -5 STORE to Step (4) 31 Timer1-Input1 (= Output-Signal 31) Step (5) -9 LOAD Step (6) 31 Timer1-Output (= Input-Signal 31) Step (7) -5 STORE to Step (8) 32 Timer2-Input1 (= Output-Signal 32) Step (9) -1 Step (10) -1 Step (11) -9 LOAD Step (12) 65 Control-Module SYS:Valve-1 (= Input-Signal 65) Step (13) -3 AND Step (14) 31 Timer1-Output Step (15) 32 Timer2-Output Step (16) -5 STORE to Step (17) 1 PLC-Result1 (= Output-Signal 1) => Stream 1 Step (18) -1 Step (19) -1 Step (20) -9 LOAD Step (21) 31 Timer1-Output Step (22) -4 INVERT Step (23) -3 AND Step (24) 65 Control-Module SYS:Valve-1 Step (25) 32 Timer2-Output Step (26) -5 STORE to Step (27) 2 PLC-Result2 (= Output-Signal 2) => Stream 2 Step (28) -1 Step (29) -1 Step (30) -9 LOAD Step (31) 31 Timer1-Output Step (32) -2 OR Step (33) 32 Timer2-Output Step (34) -4 INVERT (build: not Timer1-Output and not Timer2-Output) Step (35) -3 AND Step (36) 65 Control-Module SYS: Valve-1 Step (37) -5 STORE to Step (38) 3 PLC-Result3 (= Output-Signal 3) => Stream 3 Step (39) -7 End of program

Page 193: Software Version 3.9 - Emerson€¦ · Software Version 3.9.x ... 3- 6 3.8.1 Control module manufacturing data ... This also includes a self-test of the analyzer(s) or analyzer module(s)

Programmable Logic Control (PLC) on Control Module Level

HAS64E-IM-SW39(1) [HFID Software 3.9.x] CM PLC Page 27

9.2 Remote Valve Switching with an active System Calibration We have a MLT AM involved in a system calibration. But the MLT AM is not located nearby the platform device but in certain distance. Here we have the possibility to give the MLT AM2 valve switching commands via the LON network correspondingly to the activated system valves of the system calibration utility. These commanded valve states can be put onto the digital outputs of a local DIO board resp. onto the relays of a local SIO board. We presuppose the following situation:

System calibration Module setup

AM1-Ch1 MLT-AM2/Ch1 MLT-AM2/Ch2

Sample gas Valve Valve-1 Valve-1 Valve-1 Zero gas Valve Valve-2 Valve-2 Valve-2 Span gas 1 Valve Valve-3 Valve-3 Valve-4 Span gas 2 Valve Valve-3 Valve-3 Valve-4 Span gas 3 Valve Valve-3 Valve-3 Valve-4 Span gas 4 Valve Valve-3 Valve-3 Valve-4

For the local DIO board of MLT-AM2 we do the following setup: For the inputs signal pool of the System PLC we do the following assignment: For the action pool of the System PLC we do the following assignment:

Signal ID

Assignment

1 MLT-AM2/CH1: ExtStatus1 2 MLT-AM2/CH1: ExtStatus2 3 MLT-AM2/CH1: ExtStatus3 4 MLT-AM2/CH1: ExtStatus4

setup of local DIO on AM2

Signal code

Signal Description

Output #1 155 External Signal #1 of Ch1 Output #2 156 External Signal #2 of Ch1 Output #3 157 External Signal #3 of Ch1 Output #4 158 External Signal #4 of Ch1

Signal ID

Assignment

71 Control Module: SYS-Valve-1 72 Control Module: SYS-Valve-2 73 Control Module: SYS-Valve-3 74 Control Module: SYS-Valve-4

MLT Analyzer

local AM1

remote located MLT AM2

Ch1 & Ch2

local DIO

Page 194: Software Version 3.9 - Emerson€¦ · Software Version 3.9.x ... 3- 6 3.8.1 Control module manufacturing data ... This also includes a self-test of the analyzer(s) or analyzer module(s)

Programmable Logic Control (PLC) on Control Module Level

HAS64E-IM-SW39(1) [HFID Software 3.9.x] CM PLC Page 28

The System PLC program could look like as follows: Step (1) -9 LOAD Step (2) 71 Control-Module SYS: Valve- 1 (= Input-Signal 71) Step (3) -11 CALL action Step (4) 1 ExtStatus1 of MLT-AM2/CH1 (= Action #1) Step (5) -9 LOAD Step (6) 72 Control-Module SYS: Valve-2 (= Input-Signal 72) Step (7) -11 CALL action Step (8) 2 ExtStatus2 of MLT-AM2/CH1 (= Action #2) Step (9) -9 LOAD Step (10) 73 Control-Module SYS: Valve-3 (= Input-Signal 73) Step (11) -11 CALL action Step (12) 3 ExtStatus3 of MLT-AM2/CH1 (= Action #3) Step (13) -9 LOAD Step (14) 74 Control-Module SYS: Valve-4 (= Input-Signal 74) Step (15) -11 CALL action Step (16) 4 ExtStatus4 of MLT-AM2/CH1 (= Action #4) Step (39) -7 End of program

Page 195: Software Version 3.9 - Emerson€¦ · Software Version 3.9.x ... 3- 6 3.8.1 Control module manufacturing data ... This also includes a self-test of the analyzer(s) or analyzer module(s)

NGA 2000 System Calibration

HAS64E-IM-SW39(1) [NGA-e (HFID-Software 3.9.x)] 08/10 System Calibration Supplement - 1

NGA 2000

Software Manual

Supplement: System Calibration

NGA Software Version 3.9.x

Page 196: Software Version 3.9 - Emerson€¦ · Software Version 3.9.x ... 3- 6 3.8.1 Control module manufacturing data ... This also includes a self-test of the analyzer(s) or analyzer module(s)

NGA 2000 System Calibration

Supplement - 2 System Calibration HAS64E-IM-SW39(1) [NGA-e (HFID-Software 3.9.x)] 08/10

Table of Contents

1 Introduction _________________________________________________________________ 3

2 Valves for system calibration ___________________________________________________ 4

2.1 Assigning an output port to a system valve ___________________________________________ 4

3 Operating System Calibration __________________________________________________ 6

3.1 Set-up analyzer modules ___________________________________________________________ 7

3.2 Programming Calibration Sequences ________________________________________________ 9

3.3 Set-up general parameters ________________________________________________________ 11 3.4 Controlling System Calibration _____________________________________________________13 3.4.1 Control via menu system ________________________________________________________ 14 3.4.2 Control System Calibration by LON Variables ________________________________________17 3.4.3 Control System Calibration by Programmable Input ___________________________________ 18 3.4.4 Control System Calibration by AK Protocol Command _________________________________ 20 3.5 Calibrate Single Analyzers ________________________________________________________ 24

4 Functionality _______________________________________________________________ 25

4.1 Gas Flow _______________________________________________________________________ 25 4.2 Running System Calibration _______________________________________________________26 4.2.1 Filling sequence buffer _________________________________________________________ 27 4.2.2 Before starting actions _________________________________________________________ 29 4.2.3 Control of actions _____________________________________________________________ 29 4.2.3.1 Switch valves ______________________________________________________________ 29 4.2.3.2 Wait for purging _____________________________________________________________29 4.2.3.3 Zero Calibration _____________________________________________________________30 4.2.3.4 Span Calibration ____________________________________________________________ 30 4.2.3.5 Wait for Finishing Calibration __________________________________________________ 31 4.2.4 Finishing System Calibration ____________________________________________________ 31 4.3 Running Single Analyzer Calibration ________________________________________________ 32

4.4 Holding analog outputs of the SIO and avoid limit violation alarms _______________________33

Page 197: Software Version 3.9 - Emerson€¦ · Software Version 3.9.x ... 3- 6 3.8.1 Control module manufacturing data ... This also includes a self-test of the analyzer(s) or analyzer module(s)

NGA 2000 System Calibration

HAS64E-IM-SW39(1) [NGA-e (HFID-Software 3.9.x)] 08/10 System Calibration Supplement - 3

1 Introduction

Beside the possibility to zero and span each analyzer or analyzer module (MLT/CAT 200 channel) individually and independently from the others, System Calibration (SYSCAL) allows to combine the calibration procedures of ALL Analyzer Modules (AM’s) of an NGA 2000 analyzer system into a common process. This has been achieved with a new assignment of the valves. The idea is not longer to require for each gas of each analyzer an own valve. Instead of we have a pool of valves. The valves of this pool can be assigned to the different gases of the analyzers. That also means different analyzers can share the same value for their gases. So we have the possibility to reduce the number of valves and also the consumption of calibration gases. The program which will allow this runs on the Control Module (CM) level and needs programmable Input/Output Modules (I/O’s: DIO and SIO) on control module level too (CM [system] I/O’s located in a platform or MLT, CAT 200 or TFID analyzer): SIO: Standard I/O module with 2 to 8 analog outputs, RS 232/485 and 3 relay contacts DIO: Digital I/O board with 8 digital inputs and 24 digital outputs System calibration allows to use those outputs – relay contacts or digital outputs – to run calibration valves after assigning the valves to certain outputs (of course: physical connections between I/O’s and valves are required as well!). The assignment has to be done in a proper way which is described in the next chapters. The displayed menus are also inscribed with the appropriate LON variables.

Page 198: Software Version 3.9 - Emerson€¦ · Software Version 3.9.x ... 3- 6 3.8.1 Control module manufacturing data ... This also includes a self-test of the analyzer(s) or analyzer module(s)

NGA 2000 System Calibration

2 Valves for system calibration Before using the system calibration we have to put together the required valve pool. There are three types of I/O modules supporting this: • DIO - 24 digital outputs / 8 digital inputs (max. 4 modules per CM) • SIO - 3 digital outputs [relay contacts] (max. 1 module per CM) • [CVU - 4 digital outputs (max. 4 modules per CM) – in progress; not available, c.f.] Software supports up to 32 system valves. 2.1 Assigning an output port to a system valve Assigning of an output can be accomplished by using the menus for selected output module (DIO, SIO or CVU [c.f.]). There we have to select the NGA Control Module as the Source Module. Control module then provides the signals for the system valve V1…V32. For example the DIO: Analyzer and I/O, expert controls setup…

System & network I/O module controls…

System DIO module…

- DIO MODULE OUTPUTS - Inputs… Output number: 1 Choose source module… Choose signal… Invert output: Disabled Module state: Normal Slot ID: 1 Signal name: SYS: VALVE-1 Signal level: OFF Signal comes from: NGA Control Module

DIOOUTNUMC DIOOUTINVC DIOMODSTAC DIOSLOTIDC DIOOUTSIGC DIOOUTSTATC DIOOUTSRCC

There we have to • Select “Outputnumber” • Then choose “NGA Control Module” as module • Then choose the wanted valve “SYS: VALVE-x” as signal.

Supplement - 4 System Calibration HAS64E-IM-SW39(1) [NGA-e (HFID-Software 3.9.x)] 08/10

Page 199: Software Version 3.9 - Emerson€¦ · Software Version 3.9.x ... 3- 6 3.8.1 Control module manufacturing data ... This also includes a self-test of the analyzer(s) or analyzer module(s)

NGA 2000 System Calibration

HAS64E-IM-SW39(1) [NGA-e (HFID-Software 3.9.x)] 08/10 System Calibration Supplement - 5

It is also possible to configure the DIO outputs via LON Variables (i.e. SLTA adapter or protocol). Therefore is the LON variable “DIOOUT_ENTRYSIG” which corresponds to DIOOUTSIGC” and evaluates enum values of “ST1NAME” (enum values 0…19), “ST2NAME” (enum values 20…39) or “ST3NAME” (enum values 40…59). For digital output we have to set-up variables in following order: 1. DIOSLOTIDC 2. DIOOUTNUMC 3. DIOOUTSRCC 4. DIOOUT_ENTRYSIG SYS: VALVE-1 =20 (enum value in ST2NAME) SYS: VALVE-2 =21 . . . SYS: VALVE-32 =51 (enum value in ST3NAME) For each needed system valve we have to repeat these appropriate selections. It is also possible to distribute the system valves onto different output modules.

Page 200: Software Version 3.9 - Emerson€¦ · Software Version 3.9.x ... 3- 6 3.8.1 Control module manufacturing data ... This also includes a self-test of the analyzer(s) or analyzer module(s)

NGA 2000 System Calibration

3 Operating System Calibration Because there are many possibilities how to use SYSCAL it must be customized through the Expert Operator. There we can find the menu “System Calibration” from where we can do the required set-ups and start routines. System configuration and diagnostics…

System calibration…

System Calibration Calibration & Test procedures… Calibration Sequence Programming… Times for interval operation… Analyzer module setup…

Meaning of displayed menu points: • Calibration/Test procedures…: starting and stopping of system calibration and test

procedures • Calibration Sequence Programming…: programming of user defined calibration sequences • Times for interval operation…: setting up of automatically started system calibrations • Set-up analyzer modules…: include and set up different analyzer modules into system

calibration.

Supplement - 6 System Calibration HAS64E-IM-SW39(1) [NGA-e (HFID-Software 3.9.x)] 08/10

Page 201: Software Version 3.9 - Emerson€¦ · Software Version 3.9.x ... 3- 6 3.8.1 Control module manufacturing data ... This also includes a self-test of the analyzer(s) or analyzer module(s)

NGA 2000 System Calibration

3.1 Set-up analyzer modules Before we can run any system calibration features we have to include the different analyzer modules (AM’s) into system calibration by set-up needed parameters. Only after correct setting up, an AM is included into system calibration and only then it makes sense to go into the other menus.

System configuration and diagnostics…

System calibration…

Analyzer module setup…

-- Analyzer Module Set Up -- Choose analyzer module… Gas type: SPANGAS-1 Assigned to system valve: V5 Purge time: 20 s Note: Ranges are always calibrated separately!

Analyzer module: MLT/CH2 Enabled for system calibration: NO

View…

SCAMGAS SCVALVE SCPURGE SCMODULE SCCONTROL

Setting up an AM for system calibration means assigning valves from system valve pool. The Control Module provides support of up to 32 system-valves V1…V32. We have to decide which valves deliver which gases for an analyzer module. Also we have to know the purge time from a valve to the AM. For each of the following types in the parameter “Gas type” we have to assign a valve and the appropriate purge time: • SAMPLE GAS • ZERO GAS • SPANGAS1 (span gas for range 1) • SPANGAS2 (span gas for range 2) • SPANGAS3 (span gas for range 3) • SPANGAS4 (span gas for range 4) Optionally we can assign a blowback valve but this is not mandatory.

Conditions for the assignment: • Once a valve has been assigned to be a sample gas valve for any AM it must not be

used for zero or span gases! • The zero valve of an AM cannot be a span valve of the same AM. • All upper gas types have to be assigned to a system-valve. • If we assign a blowback valve it must not be used for any other gases.

HAS64E-IM-SW39(1) [NGA-e (HFID-Software 3.9.x)] 08/10 System Calibration Supplement - 7

Page 202: Software Version 3.9 - Emerson€¦ · Software Version 3.9.x ... 3- 6 3.8.1 Control module manufacturing data ... This also includes a self-test of the analyzer(s) or analyzer module(s)

NGA 2000 System Calibration

Example for an analyzer system: V 7 V1 AM1 AM2 AM3

AM4

AM5

V2

V3V 8

V4 V5 V6

Blowback gas Calibration gas mixtures

Appropriate assignment:

Supplement - 8 System Calibration HAS64E-IM-SW39(1) [NGA-e (HFID-Software 3.9.x)] 08/10

AM1 AM2 AM3 AM4 AM5 SAMPLE GAS V1 V1 V1 V2 V3 ZERO GAS V4 V4 V5 V5 V6 SPAN GAS 1 V5 V5 V4 V6 V5 SPAN GAS 2 V5 V5 V4 V6 V5 SPAN GAS 3 V6 V5 V4 V4 V4 SPAN GAS 4 V6 V5 V4 V4 V4 BLOWBACK V7 V7 V7 - V8

As we can see, additionally we can assign blowback valves in the “Gas Type” set-up. In the upper example these are valves V7 and V8. The blowback valve is switched on then during blowback procedure; all other valves are switched off. The blowback procedure looks for the purge times which are configured for this blowback valves. For the procedure is taken then the maximal purge time of the assigned blowback valves. This entire assigning procedure is to perform for all analyzer modules which should be included in system calibration. To display the assigned valves and purge times for each AM we can push the soft key “View…” If we want to exclude an AM from SYSCAL we can do this by entering an invalid valve. We can see in the display whether an AM is enabled for the system calibration. Attention: Remember to assign a system valve to an output port!

Page 203: Software Version 3.9 - Emerson€¦ · Software Version 3.9.x ... 3- 6 3.8.1 Control module manufacturing data ... This also includes a self-test of the analyzer(s) or analyzer module(s)

NGA 2000 System Calibration

3.2 Programming Calibration Sequences Beside the standard programs “zero calibration” and zero/ span calibration” it is possible to run the system calibration in an user definable order of up to 40 steps. The menu to set up this feature looks as follows:

System configuration and diagnostics…

System calibration…

Calibration sequence programming…

-Calibration Sequence Programming- Step#: 1 Calibration procedure type: ZERO-CAL Choose analyzer module… Select all analyzer modules! Program steps 1-10… Program steps 11-20… Program steps 21-30… Program steps 31-40…

Analyzer module: MLT/CH3

SCSTEP SCCALTYPE1 SCSTEPMOD

For programming the sequence you must 1. select “Step #” 2. select “Calibration procedure type” 3. select module Repeat this order for all program steps. The programmable “Calibration procedure types” are:

1. NoOp no operation (for deleting a step in an existing program) 2. Zero-Cal do a zero calibration 3. Span-Cal do a span calibration for all available ranges 4. Zero/Span-Cal do a zero-cal then a span-cal for all available ranges 5. Span1-Cal do a span calibration for range #1 6. Span2-Cal do a span calibration for range #2 7. Span3-Cal do a span calibration for range #3 8. Span4-Cal do a span calibration for range #4 9. END-OF-PROGRAM end of sequence 10. BLOWBACK do a blowback

HAS64E-IM-SW39(1) [NGA-e (HFID-Software 3.9.x)] 08/10 System Calibration Supplement - 9

Page 204: Software Version 3.9 - Emerson€¦ · Software Version 3.9.x ... 3- 6 3.8.1 Control module manufacturing data ... This also includes a self-test of the analyzer(s) or analyzer module(s)

NGA 2000 System Calibration

For each step we have the choice to select a specific AM or to activate the step for all enabled AM’s. After the program is input, the appropriate menu can give an overview of the current program:

- Program Steps- Step #1: Zero-Cal: ALL Step #2: Span-Cal: HFID Step #3: Span-Cal: CLD Step #4: Span1-Cal:MLT/CH1 Step #5: Span2-Cal:MLT/CH1 Step #6: Span3-Cal:MLT/CH1 Step #7: Span4-Cal:MLT/CH1 Step #8: Span3-Cal:MLT/CH2 Step #9: END-OF-PROGRAM Step #10: END-OF-PROGRAM

Supplement - 10 System Calibration HAS64E-IM-SW39(1) [NGA-e (HFID-Software 3.9.x)] 08/10

Page 205: Software Version 3.9 - Emerson€¦ · Software Version 3.9.x ... 3- 6 3.8.1 Control module manufacturing data ... This also includes a self-test of the analyzer(s) or analyzer module(s)

NGA 2000 System Calibration

3.3 Set-up general parameters One general parameter is “Calibration Procedures in Test Mode.” It is located in the menu “Calibration/ Test procedures.”

System configuration and diagnostics…

System calibration…

Calibration & Test procedures…

HAS64E-IM-SW39(1) [NGA-e (HFID-Software 3.9.x)] 08/10 System Calibration Supplement - 11

ith this parameter we can run all the calibration procedures either in the defined mode or in a test

of the modules and the appropriate times the modules

-Calibration & Test Procedures- Start Zeroing all ranges! Start Zeroing and Spanning all ranges! Start calibration program! Cancel calibration! Calibration Procedures in Test Mode: No Test Procedures… Calibration type: Zero-Cal Program step: 1 Calibration time: 16 s Previous calibration time: 57 s Blowback Result…

SCTESTMOD SCCALTYPE2 SCPROGSTEP SCCALTIME1 SCCALTIME2

Wmode. The test mode means that the valve switching and waiting for purge times is done in the samemanner like in the normal calibration procedure. The only difference is that the single calibrationswould need for the calibration are not done.

Page 206: Software Version 3.9 - Emerson€¦ · Software Version 3.9.x ... 3- 6 3.8.1 Control module manufacturing data ... This also includes a self-test of the analyzer(s) or analyzer module(s)

NGA 2000 System Calibration

Supplement - 12 System Calibration HAS64E-IM-SW39(1) [NGA-e (HFID-Software 3.9.x)] 08/10

further general parameter is “Timeout for Gas test”. It is located in the menu “Test procedures.”

his parameter is related to the possibility to activate a gas value of a specific module for test purposes.

set to “0”, no automatic back switching is done.

A

System configuration and diagnostics…

System calibration…

Calibration & Test procedures…

Test procedures…

-Test Procedures- G

as test of specific module: SAMPLE-Gas

Timeout for Gas Test (0 = no im : 180 s t eout)SCTESTGAS

Choose specific analyzer module…

SCTIMEOUT

Procedure Time: 10 s ML

SCCALTIME1 Analyzer-module: T/CH3 SCSTEPMOD

THere we can determine a time after which an activated gas test automatically switches back onto SAMPLE-Gas. If this parameter

Page 207: Software Version 3.9 - Emerson€¦ · Software Version 3.9.x ... 3- 6 3.8.1 Control module manufacturing data ... This also includes a self-test of the analyzer(s) or analyzer module(s)

NGA 2000 System Calibration

HAS64E-IM-SW39(1) [NGA-e (HFID-Software 3.9.x)] 08/10 System Calibration Supplement - 13

.4 Controlling System Calibration

fter setting up there is the possibility to start 3 different modes:

ystem zero-calibration: In this mode a zero-cal of all modules, which are enabled for

ystem zero/span calibration: In this mode will be performed a zero-cal and a span-cal for

ser defined sequence program: In this mode the user is responsible for the optimization.

lowback procedure: In this mode are switched off the assigned sample gas and

as test: It is also possible to switch for test purposes onto a specific

ny mode can be started by the following instances:

(DIO)

atic (no gas test possible!)

is also possible to cancel a running system calibration. This can be done by the following instances:

(DIO)

here is no priority by which way SYSCAL can be started. If SYSCAL was started it cannot be restarted

3 A S SYSCAL, will be performed. The order of modules depends on purge time for zero-valves because the whole calibration is time optimized. S every enabled AM. The order of calibration is optimized to have a minimum of calibration time. The only condition is to have for each AM first the zero-cal and after this the span- cal. With zero-cal an AM is zeroed with all ranges together, the span-cal is done separately for all available ranges. A range is available if its span-gas value is > 0.0. U See set-up of this mode. B calibration gas valves. An assigned blowback valve is switched on. G gas of a specific module. A calibration is not done. A• Manually by operator interaction • Triggered by programmable input• Protocol command • Programmed time-autom• LON Variable “CMFUNC” It• Manually by operator interaction • Triggered by programmable input• Protocol command • LON Variable “CMFUNC Tby a further instance. Only after cancelling it can be restarted.

Page 208: Software Version 3.9 - Emerson€¦ · Software Version 3.9.x ... 3- 6 3.8.1 Control module manufacturing data ... This also includes a self-test of the analyzer(s) or analyzer module(s)

NGA 2000 System Calibration

Supplement - 14 System Calibration HAS64E-IM-SW39(1) [NGA-e (HFID-Software 3.9.x)] 08/10

.4.1 Control via menu system

he possibility to control via menu is located in the menu page “Calibration & Test Procedures.” There

uring a running SYSCAL there can be watched current information:

user defined program (other modes than user program show a “0”!)

SCAL

3 Tcan be started and stopped any kind of system calibration respectively test procedure. System configuration and diagnostics…

System calibration…

Calibration & Test procedures…

-Calibration & Test Procedures- S

tart Zeroing all ranges! ……...

res in Test Mode: No

ZERO-Cal

on ti e:

Start Zeroing and Spanning all ranges! Start calibration program! Cancel calibration! Calibration ProceduTest Procedures… Calibration Type:

Program step: 1

Calibration time: 16 s Previous calibrati m 57 s Blowback Result…

SCTESTMOD

CCALTYPE2

SSCPROGSTEP SCCALTIME1 SCCALTIME2

D• Running calibration type • Running program step of • Consumed calibration time • Calibration time of last valid SY

Page 209: Software Version 3.9 - Emerson€¦ · Software Version 3.9.x ... 3- 6 3.8.1 Control module manufacturing data ... This also includes a self-test of the analyzer(s) or analyzer module(s)

NGA 2000 System Calibration

HAS64E-IM-SW39(1) [NGA-e (HFID-Software 3.9.x)] 08/10 System Calibration Supplement - 15

he result of calibration for included AM’s is displayed in an own menu page. This can be achieved by

emember, to run the calibration procedures as a test without actually to calibrate assert parameter

is also possible to switch for test purposes onto a specific gas of a specific module. This possibility is

Tsoft key “Result…” from different menu pages of SYSCAL. -Calibration Results-

C hoose analyzer module… ……...

an alibrated rang s:

SCMODULE

CLRESULT

Analyzer module: HFID Enabled for system calibration: No R

R“Calibration Procedures in Test Mode” to <Yes>. Itlocated in menu “Test procedures.”

esult of last run: OK Successful zero+sp c e 1+2+4 Zero-Cal failed of any analyzer module: NO Span-Cal failed of any analyzer module: YES

SCCONTROL SSCVALIDITY SCRESULT1 SCRESULT2

System configuration and diagnostics…

System calibration…

Calibration & Test procedures…

Test procedures…

-Test Procedures- Gas test of specific module SAMPLE-Gas

t eout) SCTESTGAS

Timeout for Gas Test (0 = no im 180 s Choose specific analyzer module…

SCTIMEOUT

Procedure Time: 10 s ML

SCCALTIME1 Analyzer-module: T/CH3 SCSTEPMOD

Page 210: Software Version 3.9 - Emerson€¦ · Software Version 3.9.x ... 3- 6 3.8.1 Control module manufacturing data ... This also includes a self-test of the analyzer(s) or analyzer module(s)

NGA 2000 System Calibration

Supplement - 16 System Calibration HAS64E-IM-SW39(1) [NGA-e (HFID-Software 3.9.x)] 08/10

ere we first choose the specific analyzer module and then we select at the parameter “Gas test of

ach of the following types is possible:

All closed

s (test mode deactivated)

ith parameter “Timeout for Gas test” we can determine a time after which the activated gas test

this parameter is set to “0” the automatic back switching is not done automatically and user must break

Hspecific module” the required gas. E •• Zero-gas • SAMPLE Ga• SpanGas-1 (span gas for range 1) • SpanGas-2 (span gas for range 2) • SpanGas-3 (span gas for range 3) • SpanGas-4 (span gas for range 4) • Blowback Wswitches automatically back onto SAMPLE Gas. Ifthis mode with a “Cancel Calibration” command.

Page 211: Software Version 3.9 - Emerson€¦ · Software Version 3.9.x ... 3- 6 3.8.1 Control module manufacturing data ... This also includes a self-test of the analyzer(s) or analyzer module(s)

NGA 2000 System Calibration

HAS64E-IM-SW39(1) [NGA-e (HFID-Software 3.9.x)] 08/10 System Calibration Supplement - 17

.4.2 Control System Calibration by LON Variables

YSCAL can also be controlled by LON Variable CMFUNC. Setting this variable will cause the

CMFUNC function which is started

3 Sappropriate function (see following table).

1 system zero-calibration 2 system zero/span-calibration 3 user defined sequence program 4 cancel a running system calibration 5 blowback procedure

e can also realize some other functionality with setting of LON Variables. are documented.

or example: “Test procedures”.

ere we have first to set variable SCSTEPMOD similar to the TAG of the requested analyzer module.

ppropriate enum value will start the procedure.

able of enum values and procedures:

SCTESTGAS- ???? Zero- SAMPLE Span Span Span Span Blowback

WTherefore see the appropriate menu pages, where the concerned variables F

-Test Procedures- G

as test of specific module SAMPLE-Gas

t eout) SCTESTGAS

Timeout for Gas Test (0 = no im 180 s Choose specific analyzer module…

SCTIMEOUT

Procedure Time: 10 s Analyzer-module: MLT/CH3

SCCALTIME1 SCSTEPMOD

HSetting SCTIMEOUT will set the timeout. And setting variable SCTESTGAS to the a T

function Gas Gas Gas1 Gas2 Gas3 Gas4 enum value 0 7 1 2 3 4 5 6

Page 212: Software Version 3.9 - Emerson€¦ · Software Version 3.9.x ... 3- 6 3.8.1 Control module manufacturing data ... This also includes a self-test of the analyzer(s) or analyzer module(s)

NGA 2000 System Calibration

Supplement - 18 System Calibration HAS64E-IM-SW39(1) [NGA-e (HFID-Software 3.9.x)] 08/10

.4.3 Control System Calibration by Programmable Input

e can use the possibility to control SYSCAL by triggering with a programmable input. This feature is

e accomplished by using the menus for DIO module.

here we have to select

as Source Module

3 Wsupported by inputs of the DIO module. Assigning of a programmable input can b T1. wanted input number 2. the appropriate module (see following table)

he provided functions for system calibration are:

function (negative edge) enum value in

3. the wanted function for system calibration T

function source

function (positive edge) module STINAME

SYS: Zero-Cal tion CM start system zero-calibra - 6 SYS: Zero/Span-Cal tion CM start system zero/span-calibra - 7 SYS: Program-Cal CM start user defined sequence program calibration - 8

SYS: Cancel-Cal CM stop a running procedure and disable any started

able starting commands commands en 9

SYS: CAL-Test-Mode test mode CM switches into switches off test mode 10SYS:AM-Zero-Gas AM switches zero gas-valve stop a running procedure 11

SYS: AM-Span-Gas1 for range 1 AM switches span gas-valve stop a running procedure 12 SYS: AM-Span-Gas2 AM switches span gas-valve for range 2 stop a running procedure 13 SYS: AM-Span-Gas3 AM switches span gas-valve for range 3 stop a running procedure 14 SYS: AM-Span-Gas4 AM switches span gas-valve for range 4 stop a running procedure 15 SYS: Blowback CM start system blowback procedure - 22

lease note that all actions are edge-triggered. Therefore take care of functionality of positive as well as

Analyzer and I/O, expert controls & setup…

System & network I/O module controls…

System DIO module…

Inputs…

-INPUTS - Input number: 5 Choose module… Choose function…

1 Function name: SYS:Cancel-Cal Signal level: Off Si

Pnegative edge.

Slot ID:

gnal goes to: Control Module

DIOINPNUMC DIOSLOTIDC DIOINPSIGC DIOINPSTATC DIOINPSRCC

Page 213: Software Version 3.9 - Emerson€¦ · Software Version 3.9.x ... 3- 6 3.8.1 Control module manufacturing data ... This also includes a self-test of the analyzer(s) or analyzer module(s)

NGA 2000 System Calibration

HAS64E-IM-SW39(1) [NGA-e (HFID-Software 3.9.x)] 08/10 System Calibration Supplement - 19

is also possible to configure the DIO inputs only per LON Variables (i.e. SLTA-adapter or protocol). es

or each digital input we have to set-up variables in following order.

. DIOSLOTIDC

YSIG (see enum value in STINAME)

ItTherefore is the LON variable “DIOINP_ENTRYSIG” which corresponds to “DIOINPSIGC” and evaluatenum values of “STINAME.” F 12. DIOINPNUMC 3. DIOINPSRCC 4. DIOINP_ENTR

Page 214: Software Version 3.9 - Emerson€¦ · Software Version 3.9.x ... 3- 6 3.8.1 Control module manufacturing data ... This also includes a self-test of the analyzer(s) or analyzer module(s)

NGA 2000 System Calibration

Supplement - 20 System Calibration HAS64E-IM-SW39(1) [NGA-e (HFID-Software 3.9.x)] 08/10

.4.4 Control System Calibration by protocol command

e can start and stop SYSCAL over serial interface by protocol commands. Therefore the commands

tart Command: SCAL Kx m (n)

If optional parameter n is not in command string the appropriate variable is not

tarting condition: All attached AM’s are in the Standby-Mode (AK STBY) and the variable CALSTAT

top-Command: STBY K0

Only using K0 will stop running SYSCAL-procedure (beside all the procedures of

heck-Command: ASTZ K0

The ASTZ K0 command gives the information if a SYSCAL-procedure is running

turns a “SCAL”, if not, this string is missed.

m e of SYSCAL)

Kx el

n (optional parameter)

3 WSCAL, STBY and ASTZ have to be used. S (typ (chann

number) 0 = ZERO-CAL n = 1: switch into test mode

se: switch into normal mode

K0 el

1 = ZERO/SPAN -CAL K0 2 = PROGRAM K0 3 = TEST ZERO

-GAS 999 K1… timeout in sec

4 = TEST SPAN-GAS1 K1…999 timeout in sec 5 = TEST SPAN-GAS2 K1…999 timeout in sec 6 = TEST SPAN-GAS3 K1…999 timeout in sec 7 = TEST SPAN-GAS4 K1…999 timeout in sec 8 = TEST CLOSE GASE

S K1…999 timeout in sec

9 = BLOWBACK K0 not used changed. S is 0, otherwise the response is BUSY (BS). S the other AM’s). C or not. If running, it re

Page 215: Software Version 3.9 - Emerson€¦ · Software Version 3.9.x ... 3- 6 3.8.1 Control module manufacturing data ... This also includes a self-test of the analyzer(s) or analyzer module(s)

NGA 2000 System Calibration

HAS64E-IM-SW39(1) [NGA-e (HFID-Software 3.9.x)] 08/10 System Calibration Supplement - 21

.4.5 Time Controlled System Calibration

o activate a time controlled system calibration we have to set-up this in own menu pages.

3 TFor each of the time controlled procedures exists an own menu page. System configuration and diagnostics…

System calibration…

Times for interval operation…

-Times for Zero Interval Operation- Zero-Cal is: Enabled Start time Month: 2 Day: 20 Hours: 10 Minutes: 15 Interval time: 24 h Next calibration events… Time & Date: 16:35:32 August 16, 2009 ZeroSpan Program Blowback

SCSTZERO SCBGNZERO1 SCBGNZERO2 SCBGNZERO3 SCBGNZERO4 SCIVZERO S_TIME

System configuration and diagnostics…

System calibration…

Times for interval operation…

fct2: ZeroSpan

-Times for Zero&Span Interval Operation- Zero&Span Cal is: Enabled Start time Month: 2 Day: 20 Hours: 10 Minutes: 15 Interval time: 24 h

Time & Date: 16:35:32 August 16, 2009

SCSTZERO SCBGNZERO1 SCBGNZERO2 SCBGNZERO3 SCBGNZERO4 SCIVZERO S_TIME

Next calibration events…

Page 216: Software Version 3.9 - Emerson€¦ · Software Version 3.9.x ... 3- 6 3.8.1 Control module manufacturing data ... This also includes a self-test of the analyzer(s) or analyzer module(s)

NGA 2000 System Calibration

System configuration and diagnostics…

System calibration…

Times for interval operation…

fct3: Program

B

N T

-Times for Program Cal Interval Operation-

lowback is: Disabled Start time

Month: 2 Day: 20 Hours: 10 Minutes: 15

Interval time: 24 h ext calibration events…

ime & Date: 16:35:32 August 16, 2009

SCSTPRGM SCBGNPRGM1 SCBGNPRGM2 SCBGNPRGM3 SCBGNPRGM4 SCIVPRGM S_TIME

System configuration and diagnostics…

System calibration…

Times for interval operation…

fct5: Blowback

B

N T _TIME

-Times for Blowback Interval Operation-

lowback is: Disabled Start time

Month: 2 Day: 20 Hours: 10 Minutes: 15

Interval time: 24 h ext calibration events…

ime & Date: 16:35:32 August 16, 2009

SCSTBLOWB SCBGNBLOWB1 SCBGNBLOWB2 SCBGNBLOWB3 SCBGNBLOWB4 SCIVBLOWB

S

Supplement - 22 System Calibration HAS64E-IM-SW39(1) [NGA-e (HFID-Software 3.9.x)] 08/10

Page 217: Software Version 3.9 - Emerson€¦ · Software Version 3.9.x ... 3- 6 3.8.1 Control module manufacturing data ... This also includes a self-test of the analyzer(s) or analyzer module(s)

NGA 2000 System Calibration

HAS64E-IM-SW39(1) [NGA-e (HFID-Software 3.9.x)] 08/10 System Calibration Supplement - 23

or the different SYSCAL-modes there is the possibility to

current year) n is done

ttention: in some AM-functionalities the interval time is to be input as interval hours. For example, for a

the input date/time before present point of date/time then there are added further interval times until it

e can display the calculated times in menu page “next calibration events…” e type is enabled.

F• Enable/disable the time controlled activation • Determine start time of activities (date/time of• Determine in which time intervals after start time the activatio AOther thanweekly calibration you have to calculate 24 h * 7 = 168 h. Ifis later. WBut these times will only appear when the appropriate time controlled procedur

System configuration and diagnostics…

System calibration…

Next calibra

Times for interval operation…

tion events…

Next Calibration Events Z

ero-Cal: 12:35:32 August 25, 2009

ero&Span-Cal: 12:35:32 August 25, 2009

rogram-Cal: 12:35:32 August 25, 2009

lowback: 12:35:32 August 25, 2009

: 16:35:32 August 16, 2009

Menu1Line

enu2Line

enu3Line

enu4Line

_Time

Z P B Time & Date

M M M S

Page 218: Software Version 3.9 - Emerson€¦ · Software Version 3.9.x ... 3- 6 3.8.1 Control module manufacturing data ... This also includes a self-test of the analyzer(s) or analyzer module(s)

NGA 2000 System Calibration

Supplement - 24 System Calibration HAS64E-IM-SW39(1) [NGA-e (HFID-Software 3.9.x)] 08/10

.5 Calibrate single Analyzers

ach specific analyzer has still the possibility to start a calibration over other instances than SYSCAL.

Do not start a calibration of a single AM during a running SYSCAL. This will confuse the valve

A single calibration cannot use the purge times of system valve settings. Instead of we have to set-up

It is refused to start single calibration of a second AM if the needed calibration gas valve is also any

hese considerations are valid for all AM’s which are included into SYSCAL.

3 EFor this functionality we now have some additional considerations. •

switching and the calibration commands of SYSCAL. Therefore look also for all automatic start instances of an analyzer.

the AM’s own parameters in the manner to wait for the required purge time after a valve switching. •

calibration gas valve of the first started AM. T

Page 219: Software Version 3.9 - Emerson€¦ · Software Version 3.9.x ... 3- 6 3.8.1 Control module manufacturing data ... This also includes a self-test of the analyzer(s) or analyzer module(s)

NGA 2000 System Calibration

HAS64E-IM-SW39(1) [NGA-e (HFID-Software 3.9.x)] 08/10 System Calibration Supplement - 25

Functionality

.1 Gas Flow

he gas flow through the analyzers can be configured in any way:

l rallel mixed

he state of assigned sample gas valve also decides about some AM specific states!

4 4 T1. only serial 2. only paralle3. serial and pa

T

Connections for program logic and flow configurations:

To each AM (MLT/CAT 200 channel) must be assigned a sample gas valve. d returns to the

• ple gas valve is closed.

•• During a calibration of an AM the assigned sample gas valve will be closed an

OPEN-state after the calibration of the AM is done. The calibration gases can only flow into an AM if sam

• With an opened sample gas valve it is expected to actually flow sample gas.

V1 AM1 AM2 AM3

AM4

AM5

V2

V3

V4 V5 V6

Sample 1

Sample 2

Sample 3

Calibration gas mixtures

Page 220: Software Version 3.9 - Emerson€¦ · Software Version 3.9.x ... 3- 6 3.8.1 Control module manufacturing data ... This also includes a self-test of the analyzer(s) or analyzer module(s)

NGA 2000 System Calibration

4

Supplement - 26 System Calibration HAS64E-IM-SW39(1) [NGA-e (HFID-Software 3.9.x)] 08/10

.2 Running system calibration

he system calibration is running in an own task. This task is only allowed to run once. Any try to restart

he main steps SYSCAL task has to do are realized in the following way:

. Fill all actions to do into a sequence buffer. ctions

r finishing work.

he contents of the sequence buffer depend on the type of SYSCAL (ZERO_ALL, ZEROSPAN_ALL or

is allowed to cancel the SYSCAL task. This is realized by setting a parameter to a defined value. This

anceling the SYSCAL task per digital input will also disable any further starting action as long as the

Tthis task is refused. T 12. Make some preparations before starting the a3. Work through the sequence buffer 4. Restore states and make some othe TUSER_PROG). With the start command this type is delivered. Itparameter is watched during step 3 (“working through the sequence buffer”). If a task is cancelled at step3, it will then work through step 4 and end the process. Cdigital input stay at “cancel state.”

Page 221: Software Version 3.9 - Emerson€¦ · Software Version 3.9.x ... 3- 6 3.8.1 Control module manufacturing data ... This also includes a self-test of the analyzer(s) or analyzer module(s)

NGA 2000 System Calibration

HAS64E-IM-SW39(1) [NGA-e (HFID-Software 3.9.x)] 08/10 System Calibration Supplement - 27

.2.1 Filling sequence buffer

he contents of the sequence buffer depends on

n evaluation procedure has the choice of listed action types.

Calibration types module-type

4 T• Calibration types and belonging module type • Coherence of modules and system valves A

NOP ALL-AM's ZERO-CAL single AM SPAN-CAL ZERO/SPAN-CAL SPAN1-CAL SPAN2-CAL SPAN3-CAL SPAN4-CAL END-OF-PRGM

ne calibration type has following sequence frame:

. SWITCH_VALVE WAIT, ZERO or SPAN which are possible with this valve adjustment (order is

ishing a started calibration).

he evaluation procedure optimizes the order of actions by time. as to do first its “ZERO” before any of

he PURGEWAIT-delay-measurement is started with the last SWITCH_VALVE-action.

e can see, that the SYSCAL-types “ZERO_ALL” and “ZEROSPAN_ALL” are special cases of a user

_ALL: ZERO CAL of ALL AM’s AM’s

action-types action data USER_STEP Nr SWITCH_VALVE mask PURGEWAIT time ZERO AM SPAN AM ra

O 12. do different PURGEdetermined by shortest purge time) 3. do different CALWAIT (wait for fin TThe only condition is in case of ZERO/SPAN-CAL, where an AM hits “SPAN’s” can be done. T Wprogram. • ZERO• ZEROSPAN_ALL: ZERO/SPAN CAL of ALL

nge CALWAIT AM

Evaluation procedure

Page 222: Software Version 3.9 - Emerson€¦ · Software Version 3.9.x ... 3- 6 3.8.1 Control module manufacturing data ... This also includes a self-test of the analyzer(s) or analyzer module(s)

NGA 2000 System Calibration

Supplement - 28 System Calibration HAS64E-IM-SW39(1) [NGA-e (HFID-Software 3.9.x)] 08/10

xample of a filled sequence buffer

ssignment of modules, system valves and purge times:

AM1 AM2 AM3 AMPLE-GAS V1 / 5 sec V1 / 5 sec V2 / 4 sec

E A

SZERO-GAS V4 / 10 sec V4 / 10 sec V5 / 12 sec SPANGAS-1 V5 / 10 sec V5 / 10 sec V6 / 12 sec SPANGAS-2 V5 / 10 sec V5 / 10 sec V6 / 12 sec SPANGAS-3 V6 / 10 sec V5 / 10 sec V4 / 14 sec SPANGAS-4 V6 / 10 sec V5 / 10 sec V4 / 14 sec

o do is following user program:

. ZERO-CAL ALL modules

elonging sequence buffer:

action type action data [0] action data [1] P 1

T 12. SPAN4-CAL AM2 3. END-OF-PRGM B

USER_STE SWITCH_VALVE 06 hex (V4, V2) 00 PURGEWAIT 10 ZERO AM1 PURGEWAIT 10 ZERO AM2 CALWAIT AM1 CALWAIT AM2 SWITCH_VALVE hex (V5, V1) 0011 PURGEWAIT 12 ZERO AM3 CALWAIT AM3 USER_STEP 2 SWITCH_VALVE 12 hex (V5, V2) 00 PURGEWAIT 10 SPAN AM2 4 CALWAIT AM2 END-OF-PRGM

he size of sequence buffer is currently 320. T

Page 223: Software Version 3.9 - Emerson€¦ · Software Version 3.9.x ... 3- 6 3.8.1 Control module manufacturing data ... This also includes a self-test of the analyzer(s) or analyzer module(s)

NGA 2000 System Calibration

HAS64E-IM-SW39(1) [NGA-e (HFID-Software 3.9.x)] 08/10 System Calibration Supplement - 29

.2.2 Before starting actions

efore any action of sequence buffer is done there are some preparations to do:

Store previous calibration time for the case of canceling

f an AM

.2.3 Control of actions

.2.3.1 Switch valves

he SWITCH_VALVE action just takes the action data [0] (valve mask) for the new setting of system

just to modify LON variable STCONT3, STCONT4 and partially STCONT5, which are linked to

his action also resets time (take system tick) for delay measurement of purge times.

.2.3.2 Wait for Purging

he PURGEWAIT action looks for the present time went over since last SWITCH_VALVE action.

or the still required difference up to the needed purge time is now waited. It gives time to other tasks. If

4 B •• Previous calibration time is now the actual one • Actual calibration time is reset • Cancel any running calibration o 4 4 Tvalves. We havesystem valves. T 4 T Fthere is no additional time to wait it is continued directly with next action.

Page 224: Software Version 3.9 - Emerson€¦ · Software Version 3.9.x ... 3- 6 3.8.1 Control module manufacturing data ... This also includes a self-test of the analyzer(s) or analyzer module(s)

NGA 2000 System Calibration

Supplement - 30 System Calibration HAS64E-IM-SW39(1) [NGA-e (HFID-Software 3.9.x)] 08/10

.2.3.2 Zero Calibration

efore starting of zero calibration there are some parameters (LON variables) to modify. After ending

CONTROL: This variable determines which instance is controlling range of an

meter

fter modifying these parameters zero calibration is started by LON variable:

AMFN: This variable can start functions on an AM. It is set to the value for

.2.3.3 Span Calibration

he span calibration can be done only in single ranges. Any action for a span calibration in a range can

efore starting the span calibration there are some parameters (LON variables) to modify. .

CONTROL: This variable determines which instance is controlling range of an

and eter

to the

fter modifying these parameters span calibration is started by LON variable:

AMFN: This variable can start functions on an AM. It is set to the value for

4 Bsystem calibration, these modified variables are restored to their previous value. •

AM. The parameter is set to “controlled by control module” • ZERORNGS: This variable determines if all ranges are zeroed together or

separately. The parameter is set to “zero all ranges together”. • AMSERPHYSTAT: This variable exists only in a multi-channel AM (MLT1) and

determines if the AM has a serial/ parallel gas flow. The para is set to “parallel gas flow” because only this state allows SYSCAL to calibrate the different channels simultaneously.

A •

function “Zero”. 4 Tonly be done if “span gas value <> 0.0”. BAfter ending system calibration these modified variables are restored to their previous value •

AM. The parameter is set to “controlled by control module”. • CALRANGES: This variable determines if all ranges are spanned together or

separately. The parameter is set to “span all ranges”. • AMSERPHYSTAT: This variable exists only in a multi-channel AM (MLT1)

determines if the AM has a serial parallel gas flow. The param is set to “parallel gas flow” because only this state allows SYSCAL to calibrate the different channels simultaneously.

• CRANGE: This variable controls the current range of an AM. It is set respectively required range.

A •

function “Span”.

Page 225: Software Version 3.9 - Emerson€¦ · Software Version 3.9.x ... 3- 6 3.8.1 Control module manufacturing data ... This also includes a self-test of the analyzer(s) or analyzer module(s)

NGA 2000 System Calibration

HAS64E-IM-SW39(1) [NGA-e (HFID-Software 3.9.x)] 08/10 System Calibration Supplement - 31

.2.3.4 Wait for Finishing Calibration

ny AM has the LON variables

CALSTAT

hether the selected AM is still calibrating or not, is checked by reading the variable CALSTAT.

his CALSTAT-check is done in time intervals. During the intervals, time is given to other tasks.

.2.4 Finishing System Calibration

fter system calibration was working through the sequence buffer or it was canceled there is to do some

Actualize some displayed LON variables case of cancelling and cancel them, too.

for all AM’s d sample gas” after purging time of sample

4 A • W T 4 Afinishing work. •• Look for some still running calibrations in • Restore modified LON variables of AM’s. • Switch system valves to sample gas state • Cause to set any AM’s LON variable PROCESS = “vali

gas valve.

Page 226: Software Version 3.9 - Emerson€¦ · Software Version 3.9.x ... 3- 6 3.8.1 Control module manufacturing data ... This also includes a self-test of the analyzer(s) or analyzer module(s)

NGA 2000 System Calibration

Supplement - 32 System Calibration HAS64E-IM-SW39(1) [NGA-e (HFID-Software 3.9.x)] 08/10

.3 Running Single Analyzer Calibration

single analyzer calibration also needs to switch appropriate system valves.

he difference to the system calibration is that calibration procedure of AM is already running and we

he reaction is possible by watching any change of the LON variable CALSTAT.

CALSTAT_ZERO (zero calibration in progress): switch off belonging sample valve and switch

mple valve and switch

witch off

fter a calibration command the AM itself is responsible to wait the required purge times until calibration

he reaction onto a CALSTAT-change is only active if no system calibration is running.

4 A Thave to respond upon this state. T •

on zero valve. • CALSTAT_SPAN (span calibration in progress): switch off belonging sa

on span valve appropriate current state of CRANGE-to variable.

• CALSTAT_DONE (calibration finished): switch on sample valve and s calibration gas valves.

Aactually is done. T

Page 227: Software Version 3.9 - Emerson€¦ · Software Version 3.9.x ... 3- 6 3.8.1 Control module manufacturing data ... This also includes a self-test of the analyzer(s) or analyzer module(s)

NGA 2000 System Calibration

HAS64E-IM-SW39(1) [NGA-e (HFID-Software 3.9.x)] 08/10 System Calibration Supplement - 33

.4 Holding analog outputs of the SIO and avoid limit violation alarms

ny AM has LON variable:

PROCESS

his variable is an input-variable. Its meaning is to tell the AM that another instance is not allowing the

the AM are some states depending from PROCESS.

“valid measurement” only if PROCESS = “valid sample gas”.

sample gas”.

’s now the task of the system calibration to handle the variable PROCESS for any involved AM. This is

ny switching of a system valve looks if in the switched valves is a sample valve of any AM.

sample gas time delay

PROCESS-

4 A • Tmeasurement of valid sample to flow. In •• Holding analog outputs if PROCESS = “no valid sample gas”. • Watching limit violations is switched off if PROCESS = “no valid Itdone in the following way: AIf yes, then it sets PROCESS like follows.

valve variable switched off t valid - sample noswitched on purge time of sample valve sample valid

’s very important to notice the following:

It

SYSCAL only watches state of appropriate sample gas valve for setting of PROCESS-variable.

ny additional valve, serial to sample valve, which can switch off flow of sample gas cannot be Aregistered for logic of PROCESS variable.

Page 228: Software Version 3.9 - Emerson€¦ · Software Version 3.9.x ... 3- 6 3.8.1 Control module manufacturing data ... This also includes a self-test of the analyzer(s) or analyzer module(s)

Instruction ManualHAS64E-IM-SW399/2010 HFID Software 3.9.x

ASIA-PACIFICEmerson Process ManagementAsia Pacific Private Ltd.1 Pandan CrescentSingapore 128461Tel +65 6777 8211Fax +65 6777 [email protected]

EUROPEEmerson Process ManagementRosemount AnalyticalT +49 (6055) 884 0F +49 (6055) 884 209www2.emersonprocess.com/en-US/contacts

LATIN AMERICAEmerson Process ManagementRosemount Analytical Inc.11100 Brittmoore Park DriveHouston, TX 77041 USAT:+1 (713) 467 6000F:+1 (713) 827 3328

NORTH AMERICARosemount Analytical Inc.Gas Analyzer Service Center6565 P Davis Industrial ParkwaySolon, OH 44139 USAT +1 (440) 914 1261T +1 (800) 433 6076 (Toll Free in US and Canada)F +1 (440) 914 [email protected] Response Center 800.654.7768

Rosemount AnalyticalProcess Gas Analyzer Center of ExcellenceEmerson Process Management GmbH & Co. OHGIndustriestrasse 1D-63594 HasselrothGermanyT +49 (6055) 884 0F +49 (6055) 884 209www.emersonprocess.de

© Emerson Process Management GmbH & Co. OHG 2010

MIDDLE EAST AND AFRICAEmerson Process ManagementEmerson FZEP.O. Box 17033Jebel Ali Free ZoneDubai, United Arab EmiratesT +971 4 811 8100F +971 4 886 5465